PDS Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
Users Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200004A DPDS3-PB-200004B DPDS3-PB-200004C Version PDS 7.1 PDS 7.2 PDS 7.3 Date April 2002 February 2003 October 2004 Pages 1-496 497-525 526-536
Copyright
Copyright 1984-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.2277013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
_ _______________
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraphs products, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.
If You Need Assistance
Support
For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp. If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.intergraph.com.
Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.
Intergraph General Information

All countries 1-256-730-2000
Training Registration
1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)
Mailing Address
Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison, Alabama 35758 U.S.A. You can also reach us by electronic mail at [email protected].
_ _______________
Documentation Contacts
We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison, AL 35758
_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) ................................................................................. Drawing Manager Introduction .................................................................................................... 2. Overview of Drawing Manager .................................................................................................... 2.1 2.2 Before Using Drawing Manager ......................................................................................... Drawing Manager Theory of Operation .............................................................................. 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 Drawings ................................................................................................................. Drawing Views ........................................................................................................ Drawing Borders ..................................................................................................... Drawing Plot Size ................................................................................................... Seed Files ................................................................................................................ Drawing Categories ................................................................................................. Cells ........................................................................................................................ Database Tables ...................................................................................................... Standard Notes / Code Lists .................................................................................... Labels .................................................................................................................... Drawing Managers Output ................................................................................... Customizing Drawing Manager ............................................................................ 2.2.12.1 2.2.12.2 2.2.12.3 2.2.12.4 2.2.12.5 3. Automatic Title Block Generation ....................................................... The ASCII Text Node Definition File ................................................. Supplemental Title Block Data ............................................................ Nominal Pipe Diameter Value ............................................................. Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters .....................................
Table of Contents
3 3 13 14 15 17 19 21 23 24 25 26 27 29 31 33 35 36 39 39 40 41 42 45 47 48 49 51 53 55 57
Drawing Management .................................................................................................................. 3.1 Using the Drawing Management Commands .....................................................................
4.
Drawing Manager ......................................................................................................................... 4.1 Create Options .....................................................................................................................
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 Create Drawing ....................................................................................................... Create Drawing from ASCII File ............................................................................ Copy Drawing ......................................................................................................... 4.1.3.1 4.1.4 Drawing View Data .................................................................................. 59 63 68 71 73 77 79 81 83 84 86 89 93 95 96 102 104 107 109 112 114 116 118 120 122 125 127 128 131 132 133 Create Drawing View .............................................................................................. 4.1.4.1 Named Item .............................................................................................. 4.1.4.1.1 4.1.4.1.2 4.1.4.2 4.1.4.3 4.2 4.3 Named Item by Model ........................................................... Named Item by Project ...........................................................
Saved View .............................................................................................. Define View Location ..............................................................................
Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... Create Composite Drawing View ....................................................................................... 4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 4.3.1.1 4.3.2 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View ..............................
Create Composite Drawing Views Example ...........................................................
4.4
Revise Options .................................................................................................................... 4.4.1 4.4.2 Revise Drawing ....................................................................................................... Revise Drawing View ............................................................................................. 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 Revise Drawing View Data ...................................................................... Revise Composite Drawing View Data ................................................... 4.4.2.2.1 4.4.2.3 4.4.2.4 Redefine Individual Views .....................................................
Revise Orientation .................................................................................... Reference Models ..................................................................................... 4.4.2.4.1 4.4.2.4.2 4.4.2.4.3 4.4.2.4.4 4.4.2.4.5 Copy From Active Drawing ................................................... Copy From Another Drawing ................................................ Attach Model .......................................................................... Detach Model ......................................................................... Auto Attach/Verify .................................................................
4.5
Delete Options ..................................................................................................................... 4.5.1 4.5.2 Delete Drawing ....................................................................................................... Delete Drawing View ..............................................................................................
_ _______________
4.6 4.7 Report - Drawing Management Data .................................................................................. Report Models Form ........................................................................................................... 4.7.1 4.8 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. Report Format Form ............................................................................................................ 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.9 Format Creation/Revision Form ............................................................................. Format Deletion Form .............................................................................................
Table of Contents
135 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 154 158 163 165 167 170 172 174 176 179 182 184 186 188 190 192 195 196 197 200 201 203
Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................................... 4.9.1 4.9.2 Discrimination Data Creation Form ........................................................................ Discrimination Data Revision Form ....................................................................... 4.9.2.1 4.9.2.2 4.9.3 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form ................................................... Search Criteria - Component Form ..........................................................
Discrimination Data Deletion Form ........................................................................
4.10
Search Criteria Data Form ................................................................................................ 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 Search Criteria Data Creation Form .................................................................... Search Criteria Data Revision Form ................................................................... Search Criteria Deletion Form ............................................................................
4.11
Report Form ...................................................................................................................... 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4 Report Creation Form ......................................................................................... Revise Report Form ............................................................................................ Report Deletion Form ......................................................................................... Report Approval Form ........................................................................................ 4.11.4.1 4.11.5 Approval/Revision Interface Form ....................................................
Report Multiple Submit Form .............................................................................
4.12 4.13 5.
Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................................. Approve Drawing ..............................................................................................................
Graphics Environment ................................................................................................................. 5.1 5.2 Drawing ............................................................................................................................... View .................................................................................................................................... 5.2.1 View Commands ..................................................................................................... Viewing Options ................................................................................................. 5.2.1.1 Drawing Categories ..............................................................................
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 5.2.1.1.1 5.2.1.1.2 5.2.1.1.3 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.3 Review/Revise Category .................................................... Add Category ..................................................................... Remove Category ............................................................... 204 205 206 207 209 210 211 212 214 215 216 221 222 223 225 227 228 232 234 236 238 239 241 244 246 247 253 256 259 263 265 269 271 273 275 277 View, More Commands .......................................................................................... Viewing Direction ................................................................................................... View Depth .............................................................................................................
File ...................................................................................................................................... 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 Plot .......................................................................................................................... File Design .............................................................................................................. Exit .......................................................................................................................... Active Options ........................................................................................................ Select Another Drawing ..........................................................................................
5.4 5.5 5.6 6.
Element ............................................................................................................................... Settings ................................................................................................................................ User .....................................................................................................................................
Composing Drawings ................................................................................................................... 6.1 Create Drawing View .......................................................................................................... 6.1.1 Named Item ............................................................................................................. 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2 Named Item by Model ............................................................................. Named Item by Project .............................................................................
Saved View ............................................................................................................. Define View Location .............................................................................................
Create Composite View ...................................................................................................... 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... Define Composite Drawing With Saved View ....................................................... Create Composite Drawing Views Example ...........................................................
6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7
Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... Create Section View ............................................................................................................ Create Composite Plan View .............................................................................................. Compose Drawing ............................................................................................................... Compose Drawing View ..................................................................................................... 6.7.1 Reference Models .................................................................................................... 6.7.1.1 6.7.1.2 6.7.1.3 6.7.1.4 Copy Active Drawing .............................................................................. Copy Another Drawing ............................................................................ Attach Model ............................................................................................ Automatic Attach & Verify ......................................................................
_ _______________
6.7.1.5 6.7.1.6 Detach Model ........................................................................................... Reference Model Categories .................................................................... 6.7.1.6.1 6.7.1.6.2 6.7.1.6.3 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.7.5 6.7.6 7. Review/Revise ........................................................................ Add Category ......................................................................... Remove Category ...................................................................
Table of Contents
279 280 282 283 284 285 286 288 290 292 293 295 304 315 321 326 327 328 330 333 335 338 340 341 343 346 358 369 372 373 379 381 390 393 395 396 397
Delete Drawing View .............................................................................................. Align Drawing View ............................................................................................... Revise View Data .................................................................................................... Revise Orientation ................................................................................................... Unassigned Views ...................................................................................................
Annotating Drawings ................................................................................................................... 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Mass Annotation ................................................................................................................. Place Labels ........................................................................................................................ Equipment Centerlines ........................................................................................................ Update Labels ...................................................................................................................... 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 Revise Text .............................................................................................................. Edit Text ..................................................................................................................
Revision Markers ................................................................................................................ Display Report .................................................................................................................... Place Cell ............................................................................................................................ Place Text and Line ............................................................................................................. Overlay Drawing ................................................................................................................. Review Attribute ............................................................................................................... Measure Distance .............................................................................................................. Drawing Annotation Symbology ...................................................................................... Name Label ....................................................................................................................... Coordinate Label ............................................................................................................... Automatic Labels .............................................................................................................. 7.15.1 7.15.2 Label Fence Contents .......................................................................................... Search Criteria - Component Form .....................................................................
8. 9.
Update Annotation Labels ............................................................................................................ Vector Hidden Line Manager ....................................................................................................... 9.1 9.2 Viewing Hidden Line Graphics .......................................................................................... Symbology Based VHL Drawings ...................................................................................... 9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map ....................................................................... 9.2.1.1 9.2.1.2 Drawing Type Map Association .............................................................. Search Criteria Symbology Map ..............................................................
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 9.2.1.2.1 9.2.1.2.2 10. EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria ......................................... FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria ................................. 398 401 403 405 408 410 413 414 418 419 423 424 425 426 429 431 432 433 435 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 447 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 Search Criteria for VHL ............................................................................................................. 10.1 10.2 10.3 11. Search Criteria Data Creation Form ................................................................................ Search Criteria Data Revision Form ............................................................................... Search Criteria Deletion Form ........................................................................................
Plot Manager .............................................................................................................................. 11.1 Plot Drawing ................................................................................................................... 11.1.1 11.1.2 Drawing Categories ........................................................................................... Reference Models ..............................................................................................
12.
Project Planner ........................................................................................................................... 12.1 Project Planner Command Menu .................................................................................... 12.1.1 PlotPlan ............................................................................................................. 12.1.1.1 Drawing Views ................................................................................. 12.1.1.1.1 12.1.1.1.2 12.1.1.1.3 12.1.1.1.4 12.1.1.1.5 12.1.1.2 Delete Unassigned View .............................................. Update Views ............................................................... Select Model ................................................................. Named Item .................................................................. Graphic Symbology .....................................................
Viewing Options .............................................................................. 12.1.1.2.1 12.1.1.2.2 12.1.1.2.3 12.1.1.2.4 12.1.1.2.5 12.1.1.2.6 12.1.1.2.7 12.1.1.2.8 12.1.1.2.9 12.1.1.2.10 12.1.1.2.11 12.1.1.2.12 Set View Orientation .................................................... Update Window ........................................................... Rotate About View ....................................................... Match Planar Element .................................................. Rotation 3 Points .......................................................... Dialog View Rotation .................................................. Color Shading .............................................................. Camera View ................................................................ Views ............................................................................ Level Symbology On ................................................. Level Symbology Off ................................................. Form Left/Right Screen ..............................................
12.1.1.3 12.1.2 12.1.3
Exit ...................................................................................................
View .................................................................................................................. File ....................................................................................................................
10
_ _______________
12.1.3.1 12.1.3.2 13. File Design ....................................................................................... Exit ................................................................................................... Project Setup .............................................................................................................................. 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 14. Drawing Type .................................................................................................................. Reference Categories ....................................................................................................... Copy Drawing Type ........................................................................................................ Remove Reference .......................................................................................................... Plotting Categories .......................................................................................................... Label Filter ......................................................................................................................
Table of Contents
456 457 459 463 465 468 470 471 472 473 475 477 479 481 483 491
Plot Setup Manager .................................................................................................................... 14.1 14.2 14.3 Create I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ Revise I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ Delete I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ Error Messages ..........................................................................................................
Appendix A:
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... Index ....................................................................................................................................................
11
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002
12
_ _______________
General Conventions
This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.
Table of Contents
Typefaces
Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software is doing. For example, The text is placed in the viewing plane. Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example, Choose File > Open to load a new file. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken by the user. For example, Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. For example, Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. For example, The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.
13
_ _______________
Symbols
This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note Important supplemental information.
Warning Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.
Technical tip or information provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. Map or path shows you how to get to a specific command or form.
More information indicates there is additional or related information.
Need a hint used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises.
Keyboard Conventions
The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC,k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. To press the Escape key, then K.
14
_ _______________
Terminology
Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. For example, Click Apply to save the changes. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. After selecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. For example, Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete to remove it from the directory. In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such as selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. For example, Select the line string to define the graphic template. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-select by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, you tentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. For example, Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. To key a character string into a text box. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.
Table of Contents
Double-click
Type Key in
15
_ _______________
16
_ _______________
1. Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
Designers use the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) product to create and/or revise orthographic production drawings. PD_Draw can be used with other PDS 3D products to place annotation labels identifying intelligent items and model coordinates, to plot the drawings, and to produce reports for drawings and model data.
Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
1.Overview
About this users guide

The Drawing Manager is organized by subject and commands on the Drawing Manager interface and graphics environment. It is divided into several chapters. Chapter 1 Provides an overview of the Drawing Manager. It describes general information, terms, and work flow. Chapter 2 Describes the Drawing Manager theory of operation, and describes a few customization methods. Chapter 3 Describes the Drawing Management form and options used to create and manipulate drawings and drawing views. Chapter 4 Describes the non-graphics Drawing Manager environment. Chapter 5 Describes the interactive graphics environment for Drawing Manager. Chapter 6 Describes the Drawing Composition options from the Drawing pull-down menu. Chapter 7 Describes the Drawing Annotation options from the Drawing pull-down menu. Chapter 8 Describes the Update Annotation Labels command. Chapter 9 Describes the Vector Hidden Line Manager and its use. Chapter 10 Describes the Search Criteria used in the creation of symbology based VHL drawings. Chapter 11 Describes the PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to the graphics environment. Chapter 12 Describes the Project Planner command, creating a Key Plan model file for the project, and creating unassigned drawing views.
17
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Chapter 13 Describes how to use the Project Setup command options to set defaults for all drawings in a project. These defaults are utilized at the time each drawing is created. Chapter 14 Describes the option that specifies the name, description, and the full file specifications for an I/Plot Parameter file. Appendix A Lists error messages generated by Drawing Manager.
18
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Introduction
The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design. The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise orthographic production drawings. It can be used by any of the 3D disciplines within PDS for drawing management.
Drawing Manager Introduction
1.Overview
Drawing Manager Features

The Drawing Manager can be used to: Create drawings of models for any of the PDS 3D disciplines, along with key plan drawings. Create multiple drawing views for a given drawing. Revise definition information for existing drawings or drawing views. Delete drawings and drawing views. Report on drawing information in the Project Control Database. Report on model data in a specified drawing and drawing view(s). Place drawing views graphically within a drawing border. Revise drawing view characteristics, including clipping volume, orientation, reference file attachments, and display categories. Place annotation labels on a drawing to identify intelligent items and model coordinates. Create hidden-line-removed model graphics. Plot a drawing or set of drawings. Create a key plan model for the project.
19
_ _______________
20
_ _______________
2. Overview of Drawing Manager
The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design. Since a process plant can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to break the plant into smaller units that can be handled more easily.
Overview of Drawing Manager
A Project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. The project constitutes the entire volume of the project. A Design Area represents a specified volume of the project for a specific discipline. A model is a 3D Microstation file that has a defined discipline and is located within the volume of the project. Besides the terms above, which are used in most PDS applications, the Drawing Manager uses the following terms. A drawing is a sheet or a plot used to describe the design of a model design volume (work area). Many drawings can be created from one model to completely document a design volume. A drawing can contain more than one drawing view of a model or models. A drawing view is a view of a model or models. Each drawing view within a drawing can have a different scale and each label within a drawing can have a different character size. You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views. Because the model graphics are reference file attachments, the graphics in the drawings automatically change as the design changes in the model. In other words, the drawing view graphics are always up-to-date and synchronized with the model. Unlike model graphics, labels, dimensions, and vector hidden-line (VHL) graphics are "snapshots" of the model. Labels can be updated with the Update Labels commands; dimensions must be revised by the user; and VHL graphics must be re-generated. The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of PDS 3D projects. Each project consists of a Project Control Database, Project Design Database, piping and equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, electrical raceway, and user-defined disciplines), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared by multiple projects. A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use them in any of the other PDS 3D modules. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.
2.Theory of Operation
21
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise, plot, and report on orthographic production drawings of 3D PDS models.
22
_ _______________
2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager
Drawing Manager uses PDS model files for reference when creating orthographic drawings. This means that Drawing Manager cannot perform its job until a project has been defined and at least one model file exists.
Before Using Drawing Manager
Project Setup
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on Loading PDS 3D products. Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data. Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas. Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.
Model Files
A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating PDS 3D Models. Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide MicasPlus ModelDraft Reference Guide PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
23
_ _______________
2.2
Drawing Manager Theory of Operation

This section should familiarize you with the general theory behind how the Drawing Manager module works, and how it can be customized for suiting your needs. The following topics will be discussed: Drawings Drawing Views Drawing Borders Drawing Plot Size Seed Files Drawing Categories Cells Tables Standard Notes / Code Lists Labels Drawing Managers Output Customizing Drawing Manager
24
_ _______________
2.2.1 Drawings
A drawing file does not consist of model graphics; a drawing contains intelligent labels, MicroStation dimensioning, title block text, VHL graphics, and user text and graphics. The model graphics are attached as reference files, and are not part of the actual drawing file.
Drawings
Think of a drawing as a pane of glass (drawing file) under which you can see multiple overlapping, transparent images (reference files) that correspond to user-defined sections of various model files. When you annotate a drawing, you are merely placing information on the pane of glass - not on the images themselves. The illustration below includes a drawing that references a border file and four other attached reference model files: equipment, structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway models.
All drawings have a plot size value and can have various levels or categories displayed within them. Each drawing view can be assigned a scale value.
25
_ _______________
2.2.2
Drawing Views
A drawing view is a "window" into the model with the following characteristics: User-specified scale. (For example, 3/8" = 1.) User-specified viewing direction. (For example, Looking North.) User-specified viewing volume. (For example, user-defined high and low Easting, Northing, and Elevation values, or using the volume of a previously-defined view.) User-specification of referenced models. (For example, one or more piping model files, one or more equipment model files, etc.) A drawing view can be limited to display only specific portions of the model, or the entire model (or a part of it) shown from a different perspective, or the entire model (or a part of it) displayed at a different scale for detail. Views help to document the drawing by allowing the user to display several orientations or emphasize specific portions of the model. For more information about drawing views, refer to Composing Drawings, page 227. Changes in any referenced model files are automatically reflected in the drawing view.
26
_ _______________
2.2.3 Drawing Borders
Borders are user-created MicroStation design files. For an Imperial units project where the smallest scale to be shown on any drawing is 1/8" = 1, border files should be created with Master Units =1, Sub Units=12, Positional Units = 195072, and should be drawn in a 1:1 scale. For example, cutting lines of an A size plot should be 8 1/2 inches and 11 inches long, while the actual drawing border lines should be offset from the cutting lines by whatever distance you want. A sample A-size border design is shown below:
Drawing Borders
When creating your border files, be sure to obey the drawing type conventions discussed in Before Using Drawing Manager, page 23. You must follow the conventions established by Standard Note 1202 and Standard Note 2000 for drawing size and type. Do not use any Microstation predefined shapes (square, polygon, etc.) to create the border or the cutting lines; instead, use lines or line strings. The system hidden line software (Vector Hidden Line) interprets shapes as surfaces, and may give upredictable results in the finished drawing such as clipped or missing graphics. Border files may contain specific locations for placing text (text nodes). This feature allows for automatic placement of title block information, among other uses. For more information about text nodes, refer to the MicroStation documentation. For more information about automatic title block generation, refer to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 42. The Drawing Manager uses the following guidelines to determine which drawing border to attach.
27
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The directory and network address for the drawing border is defined in the RDB Management Data with the Reference Data Manager. This setting is stored in the Project Control Database for access by the Drawing Manager. The file specifications for the drawing borders are determined by the following naming convention. dwgbrd_<drawing_type>.<drawing_size> The drawing_type is the standard note number in Standard Note Type 2000 for drawing types. The drawing_size is the text for the standard note value corresponding to the drawing size in the Standard Note Type 1202. For example, the drawing border name for an A size Equipment Arrangement drawing is dwgbrd_661.a. The center of the border is always 0 for the x, y, and z coordinates.
28
_ _______________
2.2.4 Drawing Plot Size
The Draw Plot Size Table is located in the drawplotsize file and is copied from the PD_Shell delivery directory at the time a project is created. This file specifies the view locations within a drawing on a specific media size. It contains the drawing size standard note, plotting media size, the four margins that define view location, and the standard engineering notation for the plotting media size. For more information about defining view locations, refer to Define View Location, page 84 . An example of a drawplotsize file and definitions of each field follows:
!Drawing Plot Size Table ! !Drawing Size Cutting Edge Margins from Cutting Edge (Drawing Size) !Std Note Size X-l Y-t X-r Y-b ! 1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A) 2 11"x17" 1" 0.6875" 3" 0.6875" (B) 3 17"x22" 1.1875" 0.75" 3.75" 0.75" (C) 4 24"x36" 1.375" 0.8125" 5.4375" 0.8125" (D) 5 34"x44" 1.5625" 0.875" 6.875" 0.875" (E) 6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F) 101 840mmx1189mm 56mm 35mm 198mm 35mm (A0) 102 595mmx840mm 47mm 30mm 193mm 30mm (A1) 103 420mmx595mm 38mm 27mm 190mm 27mm (A2) 104 297mmx420mm 33mm 25mm 155mm 72mm (A3) 105 210mmx297mm 28mm 24mm 65mm 24mm (A4)
Drawing Plot Size
Drawing Size Std Note This is the standard note, referenced from the Standard Note Type 1202, for the drawing size selected. Cutting Edge Size This reflects the actual size of the cutting edge which is the media cutting edge dimensions around the border that is associated with the drawing size. If plot limits of the output device are less than cutting edge dimensions, Drawing Manager scales the plot down to fit within the plotting limits. If the plot limits are greater than cutting edge dimensions, no fit is performed and the plot border including cutting lines is generated. Excess paper can be trimmed and the true A, B, C, D, E, F, or A0, A1, A2, A3, or A4 size drawing sheet remains. If plot limits are equal to the drawplotsize dimensions, no fit is performed, the plot is generated and no cutting lines appear because they are coincident with the edges of the plot medium.
29
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Margins from Cutting Edge X-l This defines the horizontal distance from the left cutting edge for composition. (This value corresponds with X1 as described in Define View Location.) X-r This defines the horizontal distance from the right cutting edge for composition. (This value corresponds with X2 as described in Define View Location.) Y-t This defines the vertical distance from the top cutting edge for composition. (This value corresponds with Y1 as described in Define View Location.) Y-b This defines the vertical distance from the bottom cutting edge for composition. (This value corresponds with Y2 as described in Define View Location.) Drawing Size This is the standard note text for the drawing size.
30
_ _______________
2.2.5 Seed Files
Seed files control the default "styles" of drawings produced by Drawing Manager. All drawings based on the same seed file will have the same types of line weights, text heights, colors, units of measurement, orientation values, default plot categories, etc. The Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File option on the Project Setup form specifies whether the default project drawing seed file or an alternate drawing seed file is used for a specific drawing type. The default project drawing seed file, drwsdz.dgn, is stored in the project directory and is used as the seed file for all drawing types, unless an alternate is specified by drawing type.
Seed Files
If the Project Seed File option is specified, all subsequent drawings created will have their line weights, line types, text options, etc. defined by one seed file data-set. For example, Equipment Drawings will have exactly the same graphic symbology and dimensioning attributes as Structural Drawings, Piping Drawings, etc. For more information about the project and alternate seed files, refer to Project Setup, page 459. You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters. For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters, page 49. For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project). If you want different drawing types to have unique graphic symbology (line weights, types, etc.), text features (fonts, sizes, etc.) and dimensioning attributes (FT, IN versus , "), then the alternate seed file option should be used. Each drawing type may have its own unique seed data which will be applied to all subsequently created drawings of that type. The alternate seed file is named draw_seed.<drawing type> and is stored in the project directory. You do not have to define an alternate seed file for every drawing type, only for those you intend to use. The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library CL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information. For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use the alternate seed file, this option would create a file called draw_seed.3 in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to the equipment drawing type). Once created, the seed data can be customized through the Project Data Manager option of Project Administrator by selecting Seed, Revise Drawing Data, and the drawing type to be customized. Only those drawing types which have been defined as Alternate Seed File types are listed. Project Seedfile is also listed for those drawing types which do not have an alternate. Once selected, the following 6 data types may be altered:
31
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Drawing Category Data Graphic Symbology Data Label Character Sizes Drawing Annotation Options Reference Database File Specifications Hidden Line Symbology Data If drawings have already been created before alternate seed data has been defined, the new data may be updated in the existing drawings with the Propagate function in the Project Data Manager. (Please note that propagate only works on: drawing annotation symbology, vector hidden line graphics symbology, character sizes for labels, and drawing graphic symbology data.) The same is true if changes are made throughout the life of the project that need to be applied to existing drawing files.
32
_ _______________
2.2.6 Drawing Categories
A category is an "alias" for the Microstation drawing level (1-63) in the drawing file; the category is a way of assigning a meaningful, name to a specific level so that the designer does not have to refer to the various drawing levels by number. When a project is created, the Project Administrator copies the default drawing category names to the project directory. The name of the copied file is drwcats.txt. You can edit this file to change the names that are displayed for drawing categories. Although you can modify the drawing category names, the meaning of a specific category will not be altered by this change.
Drawing View Specific Labels Drawing View Identification Labels Coordinate Labels Dimensioning Revision Triangles and Revision Clouds Hold Clouds Reports Miscellaneous Drawing Graphics Non-Plotted Drawing Graphics VHL Plot Date Matchlines By System Title Block Data Battery Limits Matchlines By User Centerlines Dumb Details Leader Lines for Dumb Details Extension Lines for Dumb Details Dimensions for Dumb Details Coordinates for Dumb Details Like Line No Labels Like Equipment No Labels User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category User-defined drawing annotation category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category ;Category 4 5 7 9 10 11 8 3 12 2 1 6 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Drawing Categories
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Each drawing type can also have an alternate list of category names. The name of the alternate category list is dwg_text_<drawing type>, and it is stored in the project directory. You do not have to define an alternate drawing type file for every drawing type, although this is an option. The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library CL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information.
33
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use an alternate drawing category list, a file called dwg_text_3 must exist in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to the equipment drawing type). This file must be created externally using a text editor. First, the contents of the drwcats.txt file should be copied into the appropriately-named alternate drawing category file. Then, you can edit this file to change the names that are displayed for drawing categories. If an alternate drawing category file does not exist in the project directory, or it has been named incorrectly, the default project category list will be used.
34
_ _______________
2.2.7 Cells
Cells
Cells are used to repeatedly place "dumb" graphics (not associated with the project control database) within drawings. Cells are created within MicroStation, and are used to place frequently-used objects like the North arrow and the company logo into the drawing. Another example of a cell is an eye-wash station; placing a cell representation of an eye-wash station would keep the desginer from drawing a new one each time one is placed in the drawing. PDS delivers some cells for drawing annotation, found in the cell library \win32app\ingr\pdshell\cell\drawing.cel. This cell library is copied to the project directory by the Project Administrator as a part of project creation. The drawing.cel library in the project directory must be used for any cells which you intend to use for drawing annotation. The Drawing Manager attaches this cell library each time you select a drawing for the purpose of drawing annotation, unless that drawing type has been set to use an alternate cell library. When the Place Cell command is used, the system prompts you to select the appropriate cell from a list of cell descriptions. This list of descriptions is found in the file called dwg_cell_list. This file contains two columns; column one is for the cell name, and column two is for the description. The descriptions may be edited to suit your needs, but do not change the cell names. Each drawing type may use an alternate drawing cell library. The library name and its network address are specified on the Project Setup form. You must specify the file names for any alternate cell libraries to be used; however, the cell description list for each alternate cell library will be named dwg_cell.<drawing type>, and they are stored in the project directory. If a cell description list file an alternate cell library does not exist, the system will use the default, dwg_cell_list. The cell description list file follows this format:
FLOARR NAR1 NAR2 NAR3 NAR4 NAR5 cl gradea gradeh FLOW ARROW CELL PLANT NORTH ARROW N. ARROW UP RIGHT N. ARROW UP LEFT N. ARROW DOWN LEFT N. ARROW DOWN RIGHT center line grade at angle grade horizontal
For more information about cells, refer to Place Cell, page 333, or refer to the MicroStation documentation.
35
_ _______________
2.2.8
Database Tables
PDS stores information about the project and its models, drawings, drawing views, composite views, piping, equipment, components, etc. in a series of related database tables. Each time a new model is created, or a new piping component or piece of equipment is placed, or a new view is created, a new record is placed in the appropriate table(s). This section includes and describes the tables from the Project Control Database Definition that are affected by the drawing process. These tables are stored in a file called project.ddl. You may modify only the column name fields in the project.ddl file; do not edit any other fields in the database definitions. The project.ddl file classifies these tables according to the project hierarchy (model management data, then drawing management data). Each level of the project hierarchy has further divisions (model management data has tables for engineering discipline data, design area data, and model data). The rest of this section provides the name and description of each table affected by the drawing process. For more detailed information about the Project Control Database, the project.ddl file, and table information, refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide.
MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA Engineering Discipline Data

table number = 111, (pdtable_111) PDS allows up to 10 distinct disciplines per project. When a new discipline is added to the project, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that discipline (discipline_indx_no), and a 20-character discipline name (discipline_name).
Design Area Data

table number = 112 , (pdtable_112) When a new design area is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as the above-mentioned discipline index number (discipline_indx_no), a unique index number for the area (area_index_no), and the volume coordinates for that design area
36
_ _______________
(volume_low_x, volume_low_y, volume_low_z, volume_high_x, volume_high_y, and volume_high_z).
Database Tables
Model Data
table number = 113 , (pdtable_113) Model files are attached to drawings as reference files; each drawing may have up to 256 reference model files attached. When a new model is created, a record of it gets added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for the model (model_index_no), the index numbers for the discipline and design area in which it resides (discipline_indx_no, and area_index_no), and the file location (path_name, and network_address).
DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA Drawing Data

table number = 121, (pdtable_121) When a new drawing is created, a record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that drawing, the name of that drawing type, the approval status for that drawing, and its revision information, default scale, size, and file location.
Drawing View Data

table number = 122, (pdtable_122) Each drawing may have up to 15 views. When a new drawing view is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that drawing view, the view number, view name, view scale, drawing index number, view coordinates, and drawing view type.
Drawing View Reference Model Data

table number = 123, (pdtable_123) When a new drawing view is created, a new record is added to this table. This table will never have more than 256 record entries for a specific drawing view, since the maximum number of models attached to a drawing is 256. The record includes the unique index number of the drawing view (dwg_view_index_no), and the index number for the attached model (model_index_no).
37
_ _______________
Composite Drawing View Data

table number = 124, (pdtable_124) A composite view may consist of up to 10 sub-views. When a new composite view is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that composite drawing view, the composite view number, the composite view name, the composite view scale, the index number of the associated drawing, and up to ten index numbers for the sub-views within the composite drawing view.
Drawing Revision Data

table number = 125, (pdtable_125) This table is used only if revision management data is used. When revision management data is entered into a drawing, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as the drawing index number, the revision index number, and the revision number, revision date, revised by, checked by, and revision description information as entered in the Create Drawing form of Drawing Manager.
Drawing Setup Data

table number = 126, (pdtable_126) This table stores the default information about drawing types that is established using the Project Setup form. The record includes such items as the default size, scale, and seed file.
Reference Model Display Category Setup Data

table number = 127, (pdtable_127) This table holds the default display status of drawing categories for reference models attached to drawings. This data is established using the Drawing Managers Project Setup form.
Plotting Default Data

table number = 128, (pdtable_128) This table allows use of customized iparms files (for plotting with specific pen tables or for rotating plots, etc.).
38
_ _______________
2.2.9 Standard Notes / Code Lists
PDS uses code-listed standard notes to ensure that all users share common terms for use in drawing annotation. Code lists are also used to allow some of the Drawing Manager conventions to have revisable field names; for instance, Drawing Type is standard note 2000. The code-listed values for standard note 2000 are the "names" of the drawing types that appear in the scroll list when the Create Drawing feature is used. For more information about standard notes and code lists, refer to the Reference Data Manager: Reference Guide.
Standard Notes / Code Lists
2.2.10
Labels
Drawing Manager allows placement of name labels and coordinate labels for annotation purposes. These labels are placed through the Drawing Manager interface and are "intelligent"; the labels will change if the item they describe changes, but only after one of the Update Labels commands have been exceuted. "Dumb" text, text that has no association with the PDS database, can also be placed in drawings. Dumb text can be placed using the Place Text button in the Place Labels palette, or through "raw" MicroStation. For more information about labels, refer to Annotating Drawings, page 293, Update Labels, page 321, or Update Annotation Labels, page 379. You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters. For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters, page 49. For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project).
39
_ _______________
2.2.11
Drawing Managers Output

Drawing Managers outputs are plotted drawings and reports based on the drawings. Plotting or printing requires that queues be created so that Drawing Manager will know where to send the output.
Plots
Before plotting can be done, a plot queue must be established so that Drawing Manager will know where to send the data to be plotted. For more information about plotting drawings, refer to Plot Manager, page 413.
Reports
Drawing Manager can generate reports based on the information written in the project control database. Reports require a format file and a discrimination data file in order to specify the format, content, and scope of reports generated. Reports can be saved as ASCII files, or they can be sent to a printer. Before reports can be printed, a print queue must be established so that Drawing Manager will know where to send the data to be printed. For more information about creating reports, refer to Report - Drawing Management Data, page 135 . You may also refer to the Report Manager Users Guide for more detailed information about reporting capabilities.
40
_ _______________
2.2.12 Customizing Drawing Manager
Customizing Drawing Manager
Many aspects of Drawing Manager can be customized to meet your specific requirements, and several of these procedures are discussed in this section. However, this section is not intended to cover every 3D customization issue. The following topics are discussed in this section: Automatic Title Block Generation Supplemental Title Block Data
Nominal Pipe Diameter Value Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters You may refer to the index (under customization, among other keywords) for more topics about customizing this software.
41
_ _______________
2.2.12.1
Automatic Title Block Generation

MicroStation allows you to place text nodes in design files. Text nodes are pre-defined locations for text to placed. They may be placed within the title block area of your border files. The text nodes must be created within the drawing border prior to using the automated title block feature. You may place the text nodes on any level in the drawing border, but you must ensure that this level is not displayed so that the nodes will not be displayed on the plotted drawing. When the automatic title block option is executed, all text nodes in the title block will be replaced by the associated database string and user-defined text. This data will be created on a level associated with the Title Block Data category. For more information about using text nodes, refer to the MicroStation documentation. Within PD_Draw, the Create Drawing and Approve Drawing commands both provide an option to load associated text into pre-defined text nodes in the title block of a drawing. Both options depend on an ASCII file to associate each text node to a column in the Project Control Database. This ASCII file is called title_blk_<drawing type>, and should reside in the project directory. The following ASCII code will generate the data for a title block that contains the revision number, revision date, revised by, checked by, and the revision description for the current revision and the five previous revisions. This ASCII file will also automatically generate the drawing title, the initials of the person who approved the drawing, the approval date, the project number, and the drawing number. If the drawing revision date is to be loaded into the title block, it will be displayed in the format defined for the Project Seed File through Project Data Manager.
42
_ _______________
Automatic Title Block Generation
! Sample ascii file for automatic title block generation ! ! This file needs to be in the project directory in order to be used ! by the title block load process. It should be named ! title_blk_<drawing type> ! ! Format of file: Node, Table, Column, Prefix, Suffix, Revision_number ! ! Node: text node in border file ! Table: pd_table number, or entity number ! Column: column number, or attribute number ! Prefix: hardcoded text prefix to be place before database data string ! Suffix: hardcoded text suffix to be place after database data string ! Revision_number: -nth revision (0 = most recent, -1 = second most recent, ! .etc.) ! NOTE: Dates are formatted according to type-63 data. Now modifiable in ! the Project Data Manager. ! Rev 85,125,3, , ,-5 86,125,3, , ,-4 87,125,3, , ,-3 88,125,3, , ,-2 89,125,3, , ,-1 90,125,3, , ,0 ! Date 91,125,4, , ,-5 92,125,4, , ,-4 93,125,4, , ,-3 94,125,4, , ,-2 95,125,4, , ,-1 96,125,4, , ,0 ! By 97,125,5, , ,-5 98,125,5, , ,-4 99,125,5, , ,-3 100,125,5, , ,-2 101,125,5, , ,-1 102,125,5, , ,0 ! Chk 103,125,6, , ,-5 104,125,6, , ,-4 105,125,6, , ,-3 106,125,6, , ,-2 107,125,6, , ,-1 108,125,6, , ,0 ! Description 109,125,7, , ,-5 110,125,7, , ,-4 111,125,7, , ,-3 112,125,7, , ,-2 113,125,7, , ,-1 114,125,7, , ,0 ! ! Drawing Title 115,121,3, , ,0 ! Project No 118,101,2, , , ! Drawing No 119,121,2, , , !Approval 1 Initials 200,125,8,,,0 !Approval 1 Date
43
_ _______________
201,125,13,,,0 !Approval 2 Initials 202,125,9,,,0 !Approval 2 Date 203,125,14,,,0 !Approval 3 Initials 204,125,10,,,0 !Approval 3 Date 205,125,15,,,0 !Approval 4 Initials 206,125,11,,,0 !Approval 4 Date 207,125,16,,,0 !Supplemental Titleblock data 300,121,25,,,0 301,121,26,,,0 302,121,27,,,0 303,121,28,,,0 304,121,29,,,0 305,121,30,,,0 306,121,31,,,0 307,121,32,,,0 308,121,33,,,0 309,121,34,,,0
44
_ _______________
2.2.12.2 The ASCII Text Node Definition File
The ASCII file that defines the text nodes treats any text following an ! in the first column as documentation, and will ignore it. The data string query will follow the format N,T,C,P,S,R followed by a carriage return, where: N = the text node number. This corresponds to the text node placed in the drawing border. T = the PD_table number. This corresponds with pdtable_101 (Project Description Data), pdtable_121 (Drawing Data), pdtable_122 (Drawing View Data), and pdtable_125 (Drawing Revision Data). C = column or attribute number. This corresponds with a database value within a pdtable. P = prefix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to precede the database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter. S = suffix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to follow the database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter. R = the drawing revision number. This corresponds with the revision number data as found in pdtable_125. This field is optional; if no value is entered, a default 0 for the most current revision (-1 is the previous revision number) will be used. The following example defines the drawing number, drawing title, and revision number to be loaded into text nodes 2, 3, and 5:
2, 121, 2, Drawing Number:,,0 3, 121, 3, Title:,,0 5, 121, 11, ,,0
The ASCII Text Node Definition File
Although it is acceptable to have a text node in the drawing border without an associated entry in the ASCII file, an error message will be generated if an entry is found in the ASCII file for which there is no associated text node.
Automatic Title Block Generation in Create Drawing

The Create Drawing command will generate the title block information automatically if the ASCII file for the appropriate drawing type resides in the project directory. If the ASCII file does not exist in the project directory, the automatic title block generation will not be enabled for any drawing of that type.
45
_ _______________
Automatic Title Block Generation in Approve Drawing

The Approve Drawing command provides a toggle to explicitly select the option to generate the title block information. If the ASCII file is found in the project directory, the toggle will be set to the ON position. If the ASCII file is not found, the toggle will be disabled.
46
_ _______________
2.2.12.3 Supplemental Title Block Data
Supplemental Title Block Data
Every drawing has data stored in attributes in the database (pdtable_121). The Supplemental Title Block Data form lets you add additional attributes that are shown in the Border File. These attributes can also be revision attributes. These values are recommended for new attributes when creating a drawing: Custom_1 Custom_2 Custom_3 Custom_4 Custom_5 Custom_6 Custom_7 Custom_8 Custom_9 Custom_10 character(40) character(40) character(16) character(16) character(16) character(16) character(16) character(16) integer(date) integer(date) pdtable_121, column 25 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 26 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 27 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 28 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 29 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 30 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 31 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 32 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 33 for block mapping pdtable_121, column 34 for block mapping
For more information on title block data and text, refer to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 42.
47
_ _______________
2.2.12.4
Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

There is an option in the Project Administrator module which lets you display nominal piping diameter values as you wish, for example, inches may be displayed as " or IN. To define a value, 1. Select Project Administrator from the Plant Design System (PD_Shell) form. The Project Administrator form displays. 2. Select Project Data Manager from the Project Administrator form. The Project Data Manager form displays. 3. Select Seed from the Project Data Manager form. The form displays the various seed files which can be revised/edited to suit your needs. 4. Select Drawing Data - Revise from the available files. The Project Data Manager - Drawings form displays. 5. Select Graphic Symbology Data from the Project Data Manager - Drawings form. The Graphic Symbology Data form displays. 6. Change the Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter parameter and Accept the form.
If needed, this modification can apply to any project drawings you have already created. Just return to the display of seed files (step 4) and select the Drawing Data - Propagate option. This will change the NPD field on all existing drawings. For more information on this feature, see the Project Administrator Reference Guide.
48
_ _______________
2.2.12.5 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters. Next, modify the drawing seed file through MicroStation; select Element, then slect Dimensions, then select Units to activate the Units form. Set Primary Units to Metric. Set Format to AEC. Set Accuracy to zero (0). Set Label to x1/2. Select No Secondary Units. The Units form with the appropriate settings is shown below.
Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
This will display the dimension units in millimeters with no decimal places. For example, you wiil see 1927 mm instead of the default 1.927 m or 1927.0 mm. For more information about working units, please refer to Project Administrator (PD_Project).
49
_ _______________
50
_ _______________
3. Drawing Management
The Drawing Manager option activates the Drawing Management form. It is used to create and manipulate drawings and drawing views for an existing model at any point in the design process. It also provides access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings.
Drawing Management
3.Drawing Management
Commands
Drawing Manager Creates, copies, revises, and deletes drawings, drawing views, and reports.
Drawing Composition / Annotation Activates the interactive graphics environment for drawings. The Drawing Composition commands create, attach, and modify drawing views. The Annotation commands place annotation graphics in the drawing.
Update Annotation Labels Updates annotation labels without requiring you to enter the graphics environment.
Vector Hidden Line Manager Creates hidden-line-removed graphics for a specified drawing.
Search Criteria for VHL Creates the search criteria used for symbology based VHL drawing creation.
51
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Plot Manager Provides a PDS-specific interface for plotting drawings with a full display control including manipulation of reference files. Project Planner Creates and revises a Key Plan model file for the project and creates unassigned drawing views.
Project Setup Defines the default creation definitions based on the drawing type, reference models, drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined a project setup, the system only includes the default reference models and categories you specify when creating a drawing or drawing view. See the Group Workflow section in the Using the Drawing Management Commands section that follows for information on when to use this command.
Plot Setup Manager Creates, revises, and deletes I/Plot Parameter files.
52
_ _______________
3.1 Using the Drawing Management Commands
About Drawing Management
Using the Drawing Management Commands
The Drawing Management options allow you to create and revise orthographic production drawings. They also allow you to create drawing views for these drawings. You can report on drawing information in the Project Control Database and on model data in specified drawings and drawing views. You can place annotation labels, create hidden-line-removed model graphics, and plot a drawing or set of drawings.
When to Use These Commands

You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views. You can also create up to 15 drawing views for each drawing.
3.Drawing Management
Before Using These Commands

Besides the basic project setup which is explained in Chapter 1, there are a few steps that must be done prior to activating the Drawing Management options in order to use all of the functionality that they provide. The Drawing Manager option provides access to the Report - Model Data option which is used to generate reports from models within a drawing using report definition data. Part of this definition data is a format file. The format file is not generated interactively within the PDS environment. A sample format file is provided in the \win32app\ingr\pdreport\sample directory. The format file is named piping_#.fmt. You should copy this file to the directory you will use for your report-related files. For more information on reporting and report definition data, refer to Chapter 4.
Group Workflow
If you decide to use the Project Setup option to define defaults for the drawings and drawing views that will be created during the project, you should use this command first. It allows you to define the default creation definitions based on the drawing type, reference models, drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined the project setup, the system only includes the default reference categories you have specified when creating a drawing or drawing view. If you do not use this command, all reference categories are available each time you create a drawing or drawing view.
53
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 There is no particular workflow for the rest of the commands after the first drawing has been created. Of course, you must create a drawing before a drawing view can be created.
54
_ _______________
4. Drawing Manager
This option activates the Drawing Manager form. It is also activated when the Report Drawing Management Data option is selected. This form is used to create, revise, and delete drawings and drawing views. It is also used to create and revise reports and to specify approval data for both drawings and reports. The following sections describe the basic operations involved in creating and modifying drawings, drawing views, and reports.
Drawing Manager
Commands
Create Creates drawings, drawing views, and composite drawing views. Also creates and composes drawing views and composite drawing views.
4.Drawing Manager
Revise Revises drawing definitions, drawing views, graphic drawings, and plotplan graphics. Delete Deletes drawings and drawing views. Report - Drawing Management Data Creates reports on drawings in the project. Report - Model Data Defines and creates reports of model data in a specified drawing or drawing view. Approve Drawing Defines the drawing approval data for the production stages (creation/revision) of a project drawing.
55
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Drawing Manager option from the Drawing Management form. The system activates the Drawing Manager form. 2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
56
_ _______________
4.1 Create Options
This option activates the Create Options form. It is used to create and compose drawings, drawing views, and composite drawing views.
Create Options
When a Create option is selected, the list of Drawing Types (Standard Note Type 2000) will be displayed in a scroll list on the right. For the complete list of delivered drawing types, refer to the Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager. The names of the drawing types may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.
4.Drawing Manager
Commands
Create Drawing Creates the drawing and specifies the drawing parameters. Create Drawing View from ASCII File Creates a drawing view from a userdefined ASCII file. Copy Drawing Copies a selected drawing into the specified directory on the specified node. Create Drawing View Creates the drawing views for use by the drawing and defines the parameters necessary to create the drawing view. Copy Drawing View Specifies the data required for copying drawing views from one drawing to another or within the same drawing.
57
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Create Composite Drawing View Creates a composite drawing view and defines the parameters necessary to create it.
Steps
1. Select the Create option from the Drawing Manager form. The system displays the Create Options form. 2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options. For each of the Create options, the system displays the available Drawing types in the display list. 3. Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to be used from the display list, and select Accept to continue. The system displays the create form for the selected option and drawing type. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form. Before creating drawings or view, refer to Project Setup, page 459 for detailed information on attaching reference disciplines, etc.
58
_ _______________
4.1.1 Create Drawing
This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using the drawing filename and parameters specified. The illustrations in this section reflect a Equipment Arrangement Drawing type; however, the operation is the same for all drawing types.
Create Drawing
The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator Reference Database Users Guide for more information on project creation.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created. Special characters such as $ @ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number.
4.Drawing Manager
Drawing Name Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created. Default Scale Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing scale options. Select the desired drawing scale value from the list. English Units - m m"=n n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model.
59
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 OR Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model. Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. For the complete list of delivered drawing scale values, refer to the Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager. The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager. Drawing Size Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing border size options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list. Refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 29 for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. English Units A B C D E F Metric Units A0 A1 A2 A3 A4
8 1/2 X 11 11 X 17 17 X 22 22 X 34 34 X 44 28 X 40
840mm X 1189mm 595mm X 840mm 420mm X 595mm 297mm X 420mm 210mm X 297mm Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1202. The drawing size values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.
Drawing File Name The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characters total) as the drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number is greater than 11 characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension. You can modify the Drawing File Name. Drawing File Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.
60
_ _______________
Workstation/Server Name Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file. Last Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.
Create Drawing
Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. This field is optional. Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. This field is optional. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block Data form.
Steps
1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form. The system displays the Create Drawing form. 2. 3. Key in the drawing number and name information. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices. Select the desired choice from the scroll list. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data. Select the Supplemental Title Data Block button if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 . Accept or Reject Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept. Creating Drawing The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing design file. It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field.
4.Drawing Manager
4. 5. 6.
7.
61
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 8. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files. OR Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.
62
_ _______________
4.1.2 Create Drawing from ASCII File
Create Drawing from ASCII File
This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to create drawings and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define as many drawings as necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing views for every drawing. Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. You can select the active drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. You can also submit the process immediately or select delayed batch processing. This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing. The batch process returns a mail message which reports any errors that occurred during the creation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created, and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, the related drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create Drawing View command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specified reference model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you a mail message indicating which reference models were not attached. The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.
4.Drawing Manager
63
_ _______________
Commands
Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time Submits or delays submission of the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, the system displays time fields which allow you to delay submission until a more convenient time.
Field Definitions
ASCII File Name Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing. This file contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views. Directory Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides. Network Address Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.
Before using this command

You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the right of the colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number to Network_Address is information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a new drawing. Every drawing view is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Each drawing view must be associated with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Models is information defining a drawing view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing views with one ASCII file. Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below.
Drawing_Number:00ascii02 Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation !Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each !drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields !is related to the proceeding drawing name. Default_Scale:3/8"=1 Drawing_Size:1 File_Spec:draw005.dgn Path_Name:c:\newpipe\ Network_Address:deason !Next line begins drawing view definition View_Number:d0005 View_Name:Plan !This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02 !ASCII Creation drawing. View_Scale:3/8"=1 Orientation:1 Easting_Low:1358:0
64
_ _______________
Northing_Low:415:0 Elevation_Low:9:11 Easting_High:1376:0 Northing_High:433:0 Elevation_High:27:11 Composition_Point:5 Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01
File Field Definitions

Drawing_Number: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case letters only. Special characters such as $ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number. Drawing_Name: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional. Default_Scale: Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the default scale is used. Drawing_Size: Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to the Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standard note value and not the standard note text must be used in this field. This value can be found in Standard Note 1202. File_Spec: Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure to include the .dgn extension. Path_Name: Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in the Project Setup command. Network_Address: Key in the network address where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the data specified in the Project Setup command. View_Number: Key in a drawing view number for this drawing. View_Name: Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view. View_Scale: Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the default scale for the drawing is used. Orientation: Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use the standard note text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620. Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
4.Drawing Manager
65
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format that MicroStation will accept for keyed-in dimension data. For example, the value for two feet, six and one half inches may be expressed as 0:30.5, 26.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5", or 2.55. Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. Composition Point Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to a composition point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for rightbottom, or 5 for center composition. This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if you do not wish to assign a value to it. Reference_Models: Key in the reference model numbers as used in the model management data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with a comma. The maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will be followed by another line of model numbers with a dash (-) to define more reference models. Each drawing created from an ASCII file must have at least one value for this keyword.
Other Valid Keywords

You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions. Saved_View: This keyword allows you to create drawing views using data from existing saved views. The syntax for this keyword is: Saved_View:model number,saved view name,OPTION The model number setting specifies the model that contains the saved view. This setting is case sensitive. The saved view name setting defines the saved view from which to read data when creating the new drawing view. This setting is not case sensitive. The OPTION setting specifies whether or not models attached to the source view will also be attached to the created view. The valid values for this setting are ALL, which attaches all the models, and NO_ATTACHED, which attaches none of the models. The default setting is ALL. If any of the clipping coordinates or view orientation are specified in the ASCII file after the saved_view keyword, those settings override the settings in the saved view. For example, in the drawing view generated using the following ASCII file, the Easting coordinate would be 100, and the drawing view orientation would be Top, regardless of the Easting High and Orientation settings in the saved view.
66
_ _______________
saved_view:model1,ram1,ALL Easting_High:100:0 Orientation:1
MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE You may add keywords to the ASCII file that specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated onto themselves) or just "sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view. The default is that drawings will be created with propagated structural models; however, the keywords MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be included within the drawing view definition before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword to specify which type to attach. The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been selected within the ACSII file, but has not been defined within the model management data of the Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations: 1. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; this would mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for the sparse models exist in PD_Table 113. 2. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but no models have yet been created. The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creating only drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse). If no keyword is used, by default the drawing views will be created using propagated structural models. MATCHLINES You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automatically create match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawing view. If prompted to... Keyin Data or Select Option Do this: Key in the file specifications, then set the submit toggle to the desired setting. Select Accept to create the drawing(s) and drawing view(s) with the specified ASCII file.
4.Drawing Manager
If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view is associated and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. In this situation, you must create the desired drawing view manually. If a reference model can not be attached, an error will be reported to you through the mail message, and the drawing view will be not be created. In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, go to the Revise Drawing form and select Load Title Block.
67
_ _______________
4.1.3
Copy Drawing
This option is used to copy the information about one drawing so it may be modified for use as another drawing. Selecting the Copy Drawing option activates the Drawing Type scroll list. The system then expects you to select a drawing type before further action can be taken. Once a drawing type is selected and accepted, the system will activate the Select Drawing form. Once a drawing has been selected and accepted, the system displays the Copy Drawing form.
When a drawing is copied, the source drawing will be automatically attached as a reference file to the destination drawing for the purpose of sharing annotation. Drawing annotation, revision clouds and triangles, and vector hidden line graphics will not be copied into the destination drawing. Drawings with rotated views should not be copied, as it will produce incorrect results.
Commands
Select All Views Highlights all available views to be copied into the destination drawing. Clear All Views Clears all views so that none are copied into the destination drawing. Drawing View Data Activates the Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise the definition data for drawing views. For more information about this option, refer to Drawing View Data, page 71.
68
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
SOURCE DATA Project Displays the name of the project Drawing Type Displays the name of the drawing to be copied. If a data point is placed in this field, the Drawing Type scroll list will be activated so that a different drawing type can be selected for copying. Drawing Number Displays the number of the drawing to be copied. If a data point is placed in this field, the Drawing Number scroll list will be activated so that a different drawing can be selected for copying. DESTINATION DATA
Copy Drawing
Drawing Type Displays the drawing type of the destination drawing. The default will be the drawing type of the copied drawing. To change the drawing type of the destination drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing types. Drawing Number Key in the drawing number to represent the destination drawing. Drawing Name Displays the drawing name of the destination drawing. The name of the source drawing will remain until another name is keyed into the field. Drawing Default Scale Displays the drawing scale of the destination drawing. The default will be the scale of the copied drawing. To change the scale of the destination drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing scales.
4.Drawing Manager
Drawing Default Size Displays the drawing size of the destination drawing. The default will be the size of the copied drawing. To change the size of the destination drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible drawing sizes. Drawing File Name Displays the file name of the destination drawing. The file name of the source drawing will remain until another file name is keyed into the field. Drawing File Directory Displays the directory path of the destination drawing. The directory of the source drawing will remain until another directory path is keyed into the field. Workstation/Server Displays the workstation/server name of the destination drawing. The workstation/server name of the source drawing will remain until another workstation/server name is keyed into the field.
69
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If prompted to... Do this: You must activate all fields that expect keyed-in data and press <RETURN> in each one before the entire form can be accepted. Specify Drawing Number Place a data point in the Drawing Number field, then key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the destination drawing. Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the destination drawing. Key in the file name for the design file.
Specify Drawing Name
Specify Design File Name
You must follow the filename convention of filename.ext, where the filename cannot exceed 8 characters and is followed by a period (.) and a 3-character extension. Specify Destination Directory Key in the path to the directory in which you want the file to reside. Specify Network Address Key in the network address of the machine in which you want the file to reside. Specify Drawing View Data Select Drawing View Data, to specify and name the drawing views to be copied into the destination drawing. This form also allows you to specify reference models to be copied.
70
_ _______________
4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data
This option activates the Drawing View Data form. This form allows you to specify the views that will be copied into the destination drawing. You may change the name and number of the views being copied into destination drawing, and you may add or remove reference models to or from specific drawing views.
Drawing View Data
Commands
Select All Views This command highlights all displayed views for copying into the destination drawing. Clear All Views This command prohibits all views in the display list from being copied into the destination drawing. Add/Delete Reference Models This command allows you to add or remove reference models to or from specific views as they are copied into the destination drawing. Attach Model activates a discipline list that allows you to select which disciplines data will be copied into the destination drawing view. When a discipline is selected and accepted, the system prompts you to select the areas that encompass the desired reference models. You may either select all models within an area (Attach by Area), or you may select specific models within areas (Select Models). Detach Model removes the selected model, after confirmation, from the reference model list. Auto Attach/Verify activates a the Pre-Defined/All Disciplines toggle. Depending on the setting of this toggle, acceptance of this form displays a list of reference models either from all disciplines, or from only the pre-defined disciplines for that drawing type. You may select specific reference models from the list by placing a data button
4.Drawing Manager
71
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 on the appropriate models, or you can automatically select all models by selecting the Select All command. If prompted to... Do this: Enter New View Number and New View Name Place data points in the appropriate fields so that you may specify the name and number for the destination views. Highlighted views will be copied; to keep a view from being copied, place a data point on it so that it will no longer be highlighted. Views being copied into the destination drawing must have a unique view name. Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline that contains the area that contains the drawing view to be copied. Select the area that contains the drawing view to be copied. Select a drawing view that contains a model to attach (or detach) to the destination drawing view, then select Accept. Select a model to attach (or detach) to the destination drawing view (or select Select All to select all models on the list, then select the appropriate command (Attach Model or Detach Model). OR Select Auto Attach/Verify to get a complete list of reference models from all disciplines, or from only the pre-defined disciplines for that drawing type. Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and Accept Place a data button on the toggle to change its value to the desired setting.
Select Area or Exit
Select Drawing View
Select Model
72
_ _______________
4.1.4 Create Drawing View
This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing view by: using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specified named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.
Create Drawing View

4.Drawing Manager
If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created in the model before selecting this command.
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project. View Name Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view. View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a new scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value used when the drawing was created.
73
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for opposite corner points for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate labels will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0
74
_ _______________
line style = 0
Create Drawing View
Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 77 for more information. Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 83 for more information. Define View Location Defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define View Location, page 84 for more information. Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use the Define View Location command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the drawing view to be created. Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the drawing view to be created. Do this:
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form.
4.Drawing Manager
Specify Clipping Volume
Key in the view coordinates to define the clipping volume. (The system does not have to have the Low coordinates in the Low field and the High coordinates in the High field; the command will work properly as long as the coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.) OR Select the Named Item option to use the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 77 for more information. OR Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 83 for more information.
75
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Accept or Select Other Options Select Accept to continue. Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing view, and select Accept to continue. When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models for the selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.
Select Model
76
_ _______________
4.1.4.1 Named Item
This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define the data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.
Named Item
Before Using This Option

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form. You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define the data coordinates and clipping volume.
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for diagonally-opposed corners of the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
4.Drawing Manager
Commands
Select By Model Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, and the system displays the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component to use. The system searches the selected model for that component.
77
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select By Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter the item number. The system searches the entire project for that component. If prompted to... Specify Component Number Do this: Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to the appropriate setting, then select one of the Number commands to specify a named item.
See the Named Item by Model, page 234, and Named Item by Project, page 236, sections for more information.
78
_ _______________
4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model
Named Item by Model

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form. You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define the delta coordinates and clipping volume.
Commands
Select By Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter the item number. The system will search the entire project for that component. Piping Component Number Defines the type of named item as a piping component, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Instrument Component Number Defines the type of named item as an instrument component, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
4.Drawing Manager
79
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Equipment Number & Nozzle Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Select Model Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of the Number options.
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Select Area or Exit Do this: Select the area that contains the model that contains the named item, and select Accept. Select the model that contains the named item, and select Accept. Place a data point in the field left of the model-name display field, key in the appropriate item number for the component in the model and select and press <Enter>.
Select Model or Exit
Specify Component Number
For an Equipment Number & Nozzle Number entry, enter the equipment number followed by a slash (/) and then the nozzle number, for instance, equipnum/nozzlenum.
80
_ _______________
4.1.4.1.2 Named Item by Project
This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta coordinates and clipping volume for the drawing view.
Named Item by Project

Commands
Select By Model Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, the system will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component to use. The system will search the selected model for that component. Piping Component Number Defines the type of named item as a piping component. Instrument Component Number Defines the type of named item as an instrument component. Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item. Equipment Number & Nozzle Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item with a nozzle item.
4.Drawing Manager
81
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Specify Component Number Do this: Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping Component Number, Instrument Component Number, Equipment Number, or Equipment Number & Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.
82
_ _______________
4.1.4.2 Saved View
This option creates a drawing view using a model saved view to define the orientation, clipping volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models are not filtered on the basis of the discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, are available regardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view.
Saved View
When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement, the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing view is created. Otherwise, it attaches the reference models associated with the model at the time the saved model view was created. You can revise the reference model attachments.

4.Drawing Manager
The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form. A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling tasks. If prompted to... Select Discipline or Exit Do this: Select the discipline containing the model with the saved view, and select Accept. Select the area containing the model with the saved view, and select Accept. Select the model for the drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the saved view name for the drawing view to be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit
Select Model
Select Saved View
83
_ _______________
4.1.4.3
Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it automatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is specified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to the Drawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form.
Commands
Upper Left Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the drawing view border. Upper Right Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the drawing view border. Center Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border. Lower Left Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the drawing view border. Lower Right Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the drawing view border.
84
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
x1 Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. y1 Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. x2 Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. y2 Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Location Place a data point on the button representing the quadrant where the drawing should be placed. Do this:
4.Drawing Manager
85
_ _______________
4.2
Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing view for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to be copied. When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a different drawing type, this command will attach the disciplines as specified for the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager. Do not copy rotated views, since the drawing orientation is not stored in the database. If you do copy a rotated view, the resulting view will not be rotated. Isometric views can be copied, so this warning does not apply to them.
Field Descriptions
Source Data Drawing Type Displays the discipline of the drawing selected. Drawing Number Displays the drawing number selected. View Number Select a view number from a list of existing drawing views for the selected drawing. Destination Data Drawing Number Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawing which will receive the new drawing view.
86
_ _______________
Drawing View Number Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. Drawing View Name Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new drawing view. Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Copy Drawing View
Composition Options
Define Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and composes the drawing view automatically. See Define View Location, page 84 for more information. Do Not Compose Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The view will not be displayed in graphics. Compose Coincident Defines the composition point of the destination drawing view to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied from a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in the destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the source drawing is not defined, this option is not active. This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation option. See Overlay Drawing, page 338 for more information. Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used.
4.Drawing Manager
87
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate labels will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
If prompted to... Select Drawing View
Do this: Select the Drawing View Number of the drawing view to be copied.
Specify Drawing View Number Place a data point in the Drawing View Number: field and key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The view number must be unique within the project. If you key in a number currently in use, the system will display an error message informing you that the view number is not unique. Specify Drawing View Name Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: field and key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new drawing view.
Accept to Copy Drawing View Select Accept to copy the drawing view.
88
_ _______________
4.3 Create Composite Drawing View
This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a composite view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views. You can define each of the individual views by: Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume (cube) in the model design file. Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
Create Composite Drawing View
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
4.Drawing Manager
Commands
Orientation Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view. Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User.
89
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate labels will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
Define Views for Composite Drawing View Defines, revises, or rejects drawing views for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 244 for more information. Define View Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define View Location, page 84 for more information.
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Key in the composite drawing view number (short name - up to 24 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is unique within the project.
90
_ _______________
Composite View Name Key in the view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view. Composite View Scale The scale value specified when the drawing was created is automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing view. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the composite drawing view to be created. Specify Drawing View Name Do this:
Create Composite Drawing View
Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the composite drawing view to be created.
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form. Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 93 for more information. THEN Select Accept for all of the specified views for the composite drawing view to be created. Accept or Select Another Option
4.Drawing Manager
Select the Define View Location option to pre-define the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. THEN Select Accept for all of the specified views for the composite drawing view to be created. Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be attached.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view.
91
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.
Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Create Composite Drawing View. Select the discipline from the Drawing Types list, and Accept. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept. The system activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. 4. Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to 24 alphanumeric characters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the project. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters). Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, and Accept. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view.
5. 6.
7.
92
_ _______________
4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View
This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject individual drawing views for the composite drawing view.
Define Views for Composite Drawing View
Commands
Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View Defines the clipping volume for a drawing view using a model saved view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for more information. Reject View Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
4.Drawing Manager
Field Descriptions
Drawing Views Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. You may define up to ten views. Drawing View Volume Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
93
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If prompted to... Specify Clipping Volume Do this: Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individual drawing views for the composite drawing view. Key in each coordinate individually or select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volume for a drawing view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for more information. OR Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selected composite drawing view. Accept or Select Another Option Select Accept for all of the view definitions. When this form is accepted, the system creates the composite drawing view in the database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for the first saved model view definition specified is used to position the composite drawing view during drawing composition. The system determines the location of the remaining reference file attachments for the corresponding saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment. The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is determined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used to define the viewing direction and the clipping limits.
94
_ _______________
4.3.1.1
The Saved View option is used to specify a model saved view to define the clipping volume of a drawing view that is being added to a composite drawing view. You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing Views field is updated as each view is created.
Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View
Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View

The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified. If prompted to... Select Discipline or Exit Do this:
4.Drawing Manager
Select the discipline for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the area for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the model for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit
Select Model
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models. Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and select Accept.
95
_ _______________
4.3.2
Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views. Youll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look.
96
_ _______________
Before you create the composite drawing view, youll need to know the coordinates for all volumes to be used. Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for the volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) The individual views can overlap each other.
4.Drawing Manager
97
_ _______________
Create composite drawing view name and number:
1. 2. 3.
Select Create Composite Drawing View. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and Accept. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.
4.
Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to 24 alphanumeric characters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the project. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters). Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, and Accept. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view.
5. 6.
7.
98
_ _______________
Define the views to be used in the composite drawing view:
1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view.
You can define the views in one of two ways: By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as specified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the clipping volume. By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
4.Drawing Manager
To define the views by specifying the clipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view, then Accept. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view. The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. 3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.
2.
99
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 4. Confirm the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved view:
The saved views must already exist.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Select Saved View. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and Accept. Select the area that contains the saved view, and Accept. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and Accept. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and Accept. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite drawing view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view. The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field.
6.
7.
After all of the drawing views are defined, Acceptthe form. The system updates the database.
8.
Exit the form that appears.
100
_ _______________
Attach the drawing view models, and complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2.
Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), then Accept. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing view, then Accept. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.
3.
4.
4.Drawing Manager
101
_ _______________
4.4
Revise Options
This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the database information for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.
Commands
Revise Drawing Revise drawing attributes. Revise Drawing View Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.
Steps
1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form. The system displays the Revise Options form. 2. Select one of the Revise options. For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined in Standard Note 2000) in a display list.
102
_ _______________
Revise Options
3.
Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to use from the display list, and select Accept to continue. The system displays the associated Revise form for the selected drawing type. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Manager form.
4.Drawing Manager
103
_ _______________
4.4.1
Revise Drawing
This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form which revises an existing drawing.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number. Drawing Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name. Completion Status Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage complete. Default Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale. Previous Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user. Current Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. The Revised By field is optional.
104
_ _______________
Revise Drawing
Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. The Checked By field is optional. Approved By (1-4) Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are optional. Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still available as well. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for more information on the Supplemental Title Block Data.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form. The system displays the Drawing Types. 2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type
4.Drawing Manager
Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for the project. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept. The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing. 4. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes. 5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.
105
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47. Accept the drawing revisions. The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes. 7.
8.
You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options form.
106
_ _______________
4.4.2 Revise Drawing View
Revise Drawing View
This option activates the Revise Drawing View form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing view. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list as shown on the left. After a drawing has been selected and confirmed, the system displays the Revise Drawing View form which revises an existing drawing as shown on the right. This form may be used to modify the model category data, change the clipping volume and orientation, and define reference model attachments for a drawing view.
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the drawing view graphics.
Commands
4.Drawing Manager
Revise Drawing View Data Revises the drawing view attributes. The operator sequence for this option varies, depending on the view selected. If a composite drawing view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing view. Revise Orientation Revises the viewing direction of the drawing view. Reference Models Revises or reviews the reference model attachments.
Steps
1. Select Option Select the Revise Drawing View option from the Revise Options form. The system activates the Drawing Types display list.
107
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 2. Accept Or Select Option or Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system displays a list of all the drawings defined for the project. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept. The system displays a list of the available drawing views for the selected drawing. 4. Select Drawing View Select the View Number to be revised. 5. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option to change the drawing view attributes. The operator sequence for this option varies depending on the view selected. If a composite drawing view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing view. Refer to Revise Drawing View Data, page 109 or Revise Composite Drawing View Data, page 112 for more information.
OR Select the Revise Orientation option to change the viewing direction of the drawing view. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 116 for more information.
OR Select the Reference Models option to revise or review the reference model attachments. Refer to Reference Models, page 118 for more information.
108
_ _______________
4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data
This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the drawing view number, name, scale or clipping volume information.
Revise Drawing View Data
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the view number. View Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the view name.
4.Drawing Manager
View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing view scale. English Units - m m"=n n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model. The scale factors are stored in the Standard Note Library.
OR
109
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model. Drawing View Volume Place a data point in the field and key in modifications to the clipping volume for the specified drawing view.
Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate labels will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
110
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option and a drawing view from the Revise Drawing View form.
Revise Drawing View Data
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled in for the specified drawing view. 2. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes. 3. Accept the specified revisions. The system processes the data, and updates the database. When the view scale is revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View Database Table so that any drawing view scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing for this drawing view can be updated. If the drawing view is composed, the drawing graphics will be updated. 4. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form. You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting another option on the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 116 or Reference Models, page 118 for more information.
4.Drawing Manager
111
_ _______________
4.4.2.2
Revise Composite Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Composite Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation. You can also modify the clipping volume by modifying individual drawing views within the composite drawing view.
Commands
Redefine Individual Views Redefines the individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. See Redefine Individual Views, page 114 for more information. Orientation Defines the drawing view orientation.
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the composite view number. Composite View Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the composite view name. Composite View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed composite view scale.
112
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Revise Drawing View Data and a composite drawing view from the Revise Drawing View form.
Revise Composite Drawing View Data
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled in for the specified composite drawing view. 2. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes. 3. 4. Select a new drawing view Orientation if necessary. Accept the specified revisions. OR Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. See the Redefine Individual Views section for more information. THEN
5.
Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view being revised. The system revises the composite drawing view in the database and updates the drawing view in the drawing.
4.Drawing Manager
113
_ _______________
4.4.2.2.1
Redefine Individual Views

This option activates the Redefine Individual Views field, which is used to revise individual views in a composite drawing view.
Commands
Saved View Uses a saved view model to redefine the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Reject View Deletes as many of the individual views from the composite drawing view as specified.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Views Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. Drawing View Volume Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
114
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. The system displays the Redefine Individual Views form. 2. Select the drawing view to be revised. THEN Specify Clipping Volume The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the drawing view graphics.
Redefine Individual Views
Key in all of the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individual drawing views for the composite drawing view. OR Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volume for a drawing view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for more information. 3. Accept the displayed values to define a view. The system updates the Drawing Views field with the view information, and clears the Drawing View Volume block for the next view definition. 4. Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selected composite drawing view. Repeat the steps 2 through 3 to specify the individual clipping volume coordinates to be used in the next view. You can specify as many as ten views. Accept the displayed clipping volume values for each drawing view, and select Cancel to exit the Drawing View Volume field.
4.Drawing Manager
5.
6.
115
_ _______________
4.4.2.3
Revise Orientation
This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the viewing direction for the active drawing view.
Commands
Orientation Defines the drawing view orientation with one of the seven standard orientation buttons. Rotated View Defines the drawing view orientation that does not apply to one of the seven standard orientations. The Rotated View option will not work on skewed drawing views.
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the currently selected view number. View Name Displays the currently selected view name.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Orientation option from the Revise Drawing View form to change the viewing direction of the specified drawing view. The system activates the Revise Orientation form with the current drawing view data displayed, and the active orientation for the specified drawing view is highlighted.
116
_ _______________
2. Select Drawing View Orientation The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the drawing view graphics. Select one of the standard orientations to specify the new orientation. Go to Step 4. OR Select the Rotated View orientation to display an orientation that does not apply to one of the seven standard orientations. The system displays the rotate options.
Revise Orientation
3. 4.
Select the Model Axis and key in the degrees to rotate about that axis. Accept the new orientation. Following successful completion, the system displays the message Updated Orientation. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form. You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting one of the other options on the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Reference Models, page 118 or Revise Drawing View Data, page 109 for more information.
4.Drawing Manager
117
_ _______________
4.4.2.4
Reference Models
This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to copy and attach reference models and add, remove, and review reference model categories.
Commands
Display / Snap / Locate These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list. Display On / Off controls whether or not the selected reference model(s) will display on the screen and on plotted drawings. Snap On / Off controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference model(s). Locate On / Off controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the reference model(s) into the active file. Apply to Active / Discipline / All Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle settings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same discipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines. Copy From Active Drawing Copies reference model attachments from the drawing view in the active drawing. Copy From Another Drawing Copies reference model attachments from any drawing view in the project. Attach Model Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.
118
_ _______________
Detach Model Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletes the reference model entry in the drawing view table). Auto Attach/Verify Automatically attaches reference files for the active drawing view, and displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of the selected drawing view volume.
Reference Models
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name This field displays a list of models that are attached to the selected drawing view.
Steps
1. Select Reference Models from the Revise Drawing View form. The system displays the Reference Models form. 2. Select one of the options to change the reference model attachments for the selected drawing view.
4.Drawing Manager
119
_ _______________
4.4.2.4.1
Copy From Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing View Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays the Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing view.
Commands
Select Another View Activates the Drawing View Selection form so that you can select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
Field Descriptions
Drawing View Number Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawing on the Drawing View Selection form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form. Discipline/Model Name Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing View Number Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
120
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Copy From Active Drawing option from the Reference Models form. The system displays the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views for active drawing. 2. Select Drawing View
Copy From Active Drawing
Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing view. The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form with a list of any reference model attachments for the selected drawing view. 3. Select Model Select the reference model to copy, and Accept the specified model. Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View Attachment Copy Completed. 4. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View Selection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments. OR Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
4.Drawing Manager
121
_ _______________
4.4.2.4.2
Copy From Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays. After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which allows you to define models from a specific drawing model.
After a drawing is selected and accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing views.
Field Descriptions
Discipline/Model Name Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
122
_ _______________
Drawing View Number Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
Copy From Another Drawing
Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
Steps
1. Select the Copy From Another Drawing option from the Reference Models form. The system displays the Drawing Selection form with a Drawing Types display list. 2. Select Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to use, and select Accept. The system activates the Drawing Selection form with Drawing Number display list.
4.Drawing Manager
3.
Select Drawing Select the drawing to use, and select Accept. The system activates the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views in the selected drawing.
4.
Select Drawing View Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and select Accept. The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form with a Discipline/Model Name display list of all reference model attachments for the specified drawing view.
123
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 5. Select Model Select the reference models to be copied, and select Accept. Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View Attachment Copy Completed. 6. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View Selection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments. OR Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
124
_ _______________
4.4.2.4.3 Attach Model
This option activates a Discipline display list. It is used to attach reference models to specified drawing views.
Attach Model
Steps
1. Select the Attach Model option from the Reference Models form. The system displays the Discipline display list. 2. Select Discipline or Exit Select a discipline, and select Accept. The system displays the Reference Models display list.
4.Drawing Manager
125
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 3. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area, or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. THEN Select the area to attach to the drawing view, or the area that contains the models to attach. The system attaches all models in the selected area when the toggle is set to Attach by Area. Go to Step 5. The system displays a list of models for the drawing view when the toggle is set to Select Models.
4.
Select Model The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories are displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories. Select the model(s) to attach to the drawing view.
5.
Select Accept. The system updates the database, displays a message indicating that the reference model is being attached, and returns to the list of areas for another selection. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing form.
126
_ _______________
4.4.2.4.4 Detach Model
This option detaches selected reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
Detach Model
Steps
1. Select the Detach Model option from the Reference Models form. The system activates a list of models for the specified drawing view. 2. Select Model
4.Drawing Manager
Select the reference model(s) to be detached from the active drawing view. The system highlights the selected reference model(s). 3. Accept or Select Additional Models Accept the highlighted reference models as the models to be detached, or select another model. The system detaches the selected reference model(s) from the drawing view and updates the Disc/Model Name display list. OR Select Cancel to exit the form or select another option without detaching the reference model.
127
_ _______________
4.4.2.4.5
Auto Attach/Verify
Selecting this option activates the All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle and the Propagated / Sparse Models toggle.
The All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle is used to automatically attach reference files to the active drawing view from all disciplines or from pre-defined disciplines. It displays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view. The Propagated / Sparse Models toggle is only applicable for sites using the ModelDraft product. This toggle is used to limit the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propagated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included in the same model. When the toggles are set and the form is confirmed, the system displays the Automatic Attach / Verify form and highlights the reference models which are already attached. This form is used to attach additional models.
128
_ _______________
Auto Attach/Verify
Commands
All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filters the reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the Project Setup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the drawing view volume selected regardless of the discipline. Propagated / Sparse Models Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this toggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propagated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included in the same model. Disc/Model Name Displays a list of the currently attached models on the Reference Models form. Disc/Area Number Displays a list of the available models on the Automatic Attachment/Verify in either the entire project or that are in the pre-defined disciplines, depending on the toggle setting.
4.Drawing Manager
Steps
1. Select the Auto Attach/Verify option from the Reference Models form. The system activates a Pre-Defined Disciplines and a Propagated Models toggle. 2. Set the Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle to see the filtered or non-filtered list of models, and set the Propagated Models toggle to see the propagated or sparse models, then select Accept.
129
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The system activates the Automatic Attachment/Verify form. It also displays the messages Forming Reference File List and then the message Select Model. 3. Select the models from the displayed reference file list. (Models that are already attached will already be highlighted.) Accept or Select Additional Models Highlight the reference models as the models to be attached and select Accept to continue. The system displays the message Attaching Reference Model and returns to the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. OR Select Cancel to exit the form without attaching the reference model. 4.
130
_ _______________
4.5 Delete Options
Delete Options
This option activates the Delete Options form. It is used to delete an existing drawing or drawing view from the project. When a Delete option is selected, the Drawing Types display list will activate.
Commands
Delete Drawing Deletes a drawing. Delete Drawing View Deletes a drawing view.
Steps
1. Select the Delete options from the Drawing Manager form. The system displays the Delete Options form. 2. Select one of the Delete options. For each of the Delete options, the system displays the available Drawing Types in the display list. 3. Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system displays the associated delete form for the selected drawing type.
4.Drawing Manager
131
_ _______________
4.5.1
Delete Drawing
This option displays the Drawing Number display list. It is used to specify a drawing file to be deleted from the project.
Steps
1. Select Delete Drawing and the drawing type to be deleted and select Accept. The system activates the Delete Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list. 2. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be deleted, and select Accept. The system deletes the drawing in the database and its associated design file and updates the Delete Drawing form to reflect the current list of drawings for the project. Delete additional drawings by selecting another drawing. 3. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
132
_ _______________
4.5.2 Delete Drawing View
This option activates the Drawing Number display list.
Delete Drawing View
When a drawing is selected and confirmed, the Delete Drawing View form is activated. It is used to delete a drawing view or composite drawing view.
4.Drawing Manager
Steps
1. Select Delete Drawing View and select the drawing type of the drawing view to be deleted and select Accept. The system activates the Select Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list. 2. Select Drawing
133
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select the drawing containing the drawing view(s) to be deleted, and select Accept. The system activates the Delete Drawing View form with a Drawing View display list. 3. Select Drawing View Select the view to be deleted, and select Accept. The system deletes the drawing view from the database and updates the Delete Drawing View form to reflect the current drawing view data. You can delete additional drawing views by selecting another drawing view number. 4. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
134
_ _______________
4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data
Report - Drawing Management Data
This option produces a Drawing Management Data Report on all the drawings associated with a project. It creates a report named drawing_report in the project directory.
Steps
1. Select Report - Drawing Management Data from the Drawing Manager form. Creating Drawing Management Data Report The system creates the report in the project directory. Drawing Management Report has been Created
4.Drawing Manager
Sample Report
Drawing Management Data Report Date : 18-Sep-97 Time : 12:24:06 Project Number : stdeng_o43 Project Name : Standard English Job Number : 1234 Company Name : Created on 6.2 Plant Name : Intergraph Corporation Drawing Management Data Report Drawing Type: Drawing : 00FD0102 00fd0102.dgn cs108g Foundation Location Drawings Area 40 Fondation Location Plan 3/8"=1 c:\u4\oes43\draw\ A D
135
_ _______________
Drawing : 40FL0101 40fl0101.dgn cs108g Area 40 Foundation Locations c:\u4\oes43\draw\ 3/8"=1 D Drawing Management Data Report Drawing Type: Piling Drawings Drawing : bctest dssds bctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\ Drawing Management Data Report Drawing Type: Drawing : 311 311.dgn Plot Plans test drawing #311 c:\plot\ test drawing #311A c:\plot\ 1/4"=1 A D A D 3/8"=1
plot1
Drawing : 311 variation 311variat.dgn plot2
1/4"=1
Drawing Management Data Report Drawing Type: Equipment Arrangement Drawings drawing 311 from Omaha, NE c:\draw\user\ Training 1: RLH c:\rlhcert\dwg\ Training 2: RLH c:\rlhcert\dwg\ Training 3: RLH c:\rlhcert\dwg\ Train 4 c:\rlhcert\dwg\ 3/8"=1 A C
Drawing : drwX drwx.dgn drwmgt Drawing:train.1 train.1.dgn rlh123 Drawing : train.2 train.2.dgn rlh123 Drawing : train.3 train.3.dgn rlh123 Drawing : train.X train.x.dgn rlh123
3/16"=1
3/16"=1
3/16"=1
3/16"=1
Drawing Management Data Report Drawing Type: Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections & Details Area 40 Title Block Test c:\u4\oes43\draw\ Area 40 Piping Plan c:\u4\oes43\draw\ Title Block Test c:\u4\oes43\draw\ test drawings c:\u4\oes43\draw\ test for symbology c:\u4\oes43\draw\ test dwg c:\u4\oes43\draw\ 3/8"=1 A D
Drawing : 40PPSD001 40ppsd001.dgn cs108g Drawing : 40pd0101 40pd0101.dgn cs108g Drawing : 40ppsd101 40ppsd101.dgn cs108g Drawing : bcdraw bcdraw.dgn cs108g Drawing : lctest lctest.dgn cs108g Drawing : test2 test.dgn cs108g
3/8"=1
3/8"=1
3/8"=1
1/4"=1
1/4"=1
136
_ _______________
Drawing : vhl2_0 vhl2_0.dgn cs108g Drawing : wwdraw1 wwdraw1.dgn cs108g testing of VHL version 2.0 c:\u4\oes43\draw\ Documentation Drawing c:\u4\oes43\draw\ 3/8"=1 3/8"=1
Report - Drawing Management Data
4.Drawing Manager
137
_ _______________
4.7
Report Models Form

This command activates the Report Models form. This form is used to generate reports from the models within the drawing with the report definition data. This functionality is also used to report the custom defined drawing management data from attributes in the drawing database. The Drawing Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.
Each report is based on only one drawing, with only one view in that drawing. Multiple drawings can be reported on in batch mode by creating multiple discrimination data sets.
138
_ _______________
Options
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report Format Form, page 142. Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 148. Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page 174. Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 190.
Report Models Form
4.Drawing Manager
139
_ _______________
4.7.1
Using the Report Commands

Understanding Report Files and Records
The Drawing Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.
Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Drawing Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without the format file(s), Drawing Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting. Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file. A format file can be created to generate drawing management data and controlled by the user. A sample drawing management format file is delivered at PDPROJEC\sample\drw_mgt.fmt.
Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Drawing Report Manager. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file. The discrimination data form in Drawing Manager, by default, sets one drawing per discrimination data file. To run a report on drawing management data on all drawings, create the discrimination data file in Report Manager. The discrimination data file will allow only piping and eqp models to be attached. Select any piping model to create the discrimination data file, and access this discrimination data file when creating the report.
140
_ _______________
Report Output and Record
The Drawing Report Manager creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.
Using the Report Commands
The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.)
4.Drawing Manager
Group Workflow
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default, simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file, and their corresponding records have been established. Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.
141
_ _______________
4.8
Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the Report Format form is displayed.
This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files location has been entered into the project control database.
Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 144. Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 144. Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page 144.
142
_ _______________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 146.
Report Format Form
4.Drawing Manager
143
_ _______________
4.8.1
Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Format Creation/Revision form is displayed.
This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.
Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file. Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file. File Specification The file name of the format file to reference. Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting. Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the active setting.
144
_ _______________
Before Using this Form
You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for MTO reporting is named piping_#.fmt.
Format Creation/Revision Form
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise. A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to Step 3. 2. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept. Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information. 3. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each field. Then click Accept. The project control database is updated.
4.Drawing Manager
145
_ _______________
4.8.2
Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.
This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.
Fields and Options

Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.
146
_ _______________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.
Format Deletion Form
4.Drawing Manager
147
_ _______________
4.9
Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the Discrimination Data form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or deleted as needed. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report.
Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created. Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project control database.
148
_ _______________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 163.
Discrimination Data Form
4.Drawing Manager
149
_ _______________
4.9.1
Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed.
This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates a corresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form to specify segment and component search criteria. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options

Drawing Number The drawing number of the active drawing. Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the project control database. File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created. File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings.
150
_ _______________
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active settings. Select Drawing View Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on the active drawing. Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158.
Discrimination Data Creation Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create The Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click Accept. After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.
4.Drawing Manager
151
_ _______________
4.9.2
Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discrimination data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed. In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria data. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options

Drawing Number The drawing number of the active drawing. Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in the project control database. File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created. File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active settings. File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active settings.
152
_ _______________
Select Drawing View Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on the active drawing. Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158. Delete Views Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on the active drawing.
Discrimination Data Revision Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise. The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click Accept. After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file, be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the discrimination data file is not actually updated until you click Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form.
4.Drawing Manager
153
_ _______________
4.9.2.1
Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form

When you choose Segment Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation form or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Piping Segment form is displayed.
This form specifies which segment attributes are to be reported on. The most commonly reported attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options. To display all available attributes, click Other.
154
_ _______________
When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom of the form.
The combination of these operators with either attribute values or (where applicable) code list values enables you to fully specify an attribute restriction (for example, fluid code = AC). You can combine these specifications as needed using the And and Or options, which are displayed in place of the operator options after you have defined a segment attribute restriction.
4.Drawing Manager
When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form is displayed. This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute. Simply select a code from the list and click Accept to continue with the specification. When you are using this form to copy and/or revise an existing discrimination data file, additional options are provided for you to insert, remove, or clear search criteria specifications.
155
_ _______________
Fields and Options

Piping Segment Displays the restricted segment attributes once they have been defined. Unit Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Fluid Code Restricts the reported segments by means of the fluid code attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Unit Code Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit code attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Line Sequence Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the line sequence number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Nominal Piping Diameter Restricts the reported segments by means of the nominal piping diameter attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Piping Materials Class Restricts the reported segments by means of the piping materials class attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Line ID Restricts the reported segments by means of the line ID attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Insulation Purpose Restricts the reported segments by means of the insulation purpose attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Heat Tracing Requirement Restricts the reported segments by means of the heat tracing requirement attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Train Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the train number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Construction Status Restricts the reported segments by means of the construction status attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Approval Status Restricts the reported segments by means of the approval status attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Other Displays a list of all available attributes. Brief List Updates the form to display the attribute options.
156
_ _______________
Insert Search Definition Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria to the specification.
Remove Search Definition Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria. To remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, and click Accept. Clear Search Criteria Removes the complete search criteria specification. Select this option and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Segment Search Criteria. The Search Criteria - Piping Segment form is displayed. 2. Select Attribute Select an attribute to be restricted. The available operator options are displayed. 3. Select Operator Select an operator from the displayed options. 4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. For all other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then click Accept.
5.
4.Drawing Manager
157
_ _______________
4.9.2.2
Search Criteria - Component Form

When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation form or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no search criteria (that is, no restrictions all component attributes are reported). The most commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.
158
_ _______________
Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code and Fabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Other option is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for each category, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support. When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom of the form.
4.Drawing Manager
When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list of associated attributes is displayed.
159
_ _______________
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed as a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, select the appropriate button.
Fields and Options

Component Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been defined. Commodity Name Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity name attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Commodity Code Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity code attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Fabrication Category Restricts the reported components by means of the frabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Component Group Number Restricts the reported components by means of the component group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Tag/Component Number Restricts the reported components by means of the tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
160
_ _______________
Other Displays the entity options.
Piping Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Instrument Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Piping/Tubing Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Pipe Support Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Clear ALL Component Search Criteria Deletes the restricted component attributes once they have been defined. Insert Search Definition Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria to the specification. Remove Search Definition Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria. To remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, and click Accept.
4.Drawing Manager
Clear Search Criteria Removes the complete search criteria specification. Select this option and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Component Search Criteria. The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed. 2. Select Attribute Select an attribute to be restricted. The available operator options are displayed. 3. Select Operator
161
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select an operator from the displayed options. 4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. For all other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then click Accept. 5.
162
_ _______________
4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form
Discrimination Data Deletion Form
4.Drawing Manager
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
163
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.
164
_ _______________
4.10 Search Criteria Data Form
When you select Report Search Criteria from the Report Manager form, the Search Criteria Data form is displayed.
Search Criteria Data Form
Use this form to create, copy, revise, or delete report search criteria. Search criteria data determines and reduces the amount of data reported by restricting the reporting of certain attributes. Rather than report all data in a model, search criteria specifications narrow the report to return only data that matches certain criteria. You can specify search criteria as you create the discrimination data file; the options on the Search Criteria Data form create the same data as a separate step. If you specify search criteria data as you create the discrimination data file and by means of the Report Search Criteria form, the specifications defined using the Report Search Criteria take precedence when the report is generated.
4.Drawing Manager
Options
Create Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, see Search Criteria Data Creation Form, page 167. Copy Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the record of an existing report search criteria file from the project control database and copies the corresponding data file. For more information, see Search Criteria Data Revision Form, page 170.
165
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies an existing record of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, see Search Criteria Data Revision Form, page 170. Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report search criteria data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Search Criteria Deletion Form, page 172.
166
_ _______________
4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form
When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
Search Criteria Data Creation Form
This form creates a report search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a corresponding record in the project control database. If you specify search criteria using both this form and the search criteria options when you create the discrimination data, the search criteria specified on this form (Search Criteria Data Creation) takes precedence.
4.Drawing Manager
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. File Specification The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file to be created. File Path The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the active settings.
167
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 File Node The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file is located. This field retains the active settings. Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158. Revise AND/OR Relation Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Use this list to change the And/Or relationships between piping segment search criteria (table 12, piping segment data) and the search criteria for the component data in table 34, piping component data; table 50, piping/tubing data; table 67, instrument component data; and table 80, pipe support data. Each category of component search criteria data is related to the piping segment search criteria by a logical AND or a logical OR. By default, the logical relationship between the piping segment search criteria and the four categories of component search criteria is AND. This means that only components that meet the criteria defined for both sets of criteria are reported. Setting this relationship to OR increases the amount of data reported in that all components that match either set of criteria are reported. This is not an exclusive OR. With the OR setting, components that match both (or either) sets of criteria are reported.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click Accept.
168
_ _______________
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file, be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the search criteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the Search Criteria Data Creation form.
4.Drawing Manager
169
_ _______________
4.10.2
Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. File Specification The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be created. File Path The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the active settings. Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158. Define Volume Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the coordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see The Define Volume Form.
170
_ _______________
Revise AND/OR Relation Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Search Criteria form, select Copy or Revise. The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data files. 2. 3. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click Accept.
4.Drawing Manager
171
_ _______________
4.10.3
Search Criteria Deletion Form

Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
172
_ _______________
4.Drawing Manager
173
_ _______________
4.11
Report Form
When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.
This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description, and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included in the format file. At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following information: Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and report node, path, and file name. Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name. Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence. Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location (node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.
174
_ _______________
Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 176. Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page 179. Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 182. Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report. For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 184. Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page 188.
Report Form
4.Drawing Manager
175
_ _______________
4.11.1
Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.
Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly as needed.
Fields and Options

Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 190. Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 190.
176
_ _______________
Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept.
Report Creation Form
Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept. Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional.
4.Drawing Manager
Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
177
_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create. The Report Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.
4.
5.
178
_ _______________
4.11.2 Revise Report Form
When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.
Revise Report Form
This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record.
Fields and Options

Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file. Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings. Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings. Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept. Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
4.Drawing Manager
179
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title, this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the report output file is generated.
180
_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise. The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files. 2. Select Report From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept. The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. 3. Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. 4. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file.
Revise Report Form
5.
6.
4.Drawing Manager
181
_ _______________
4.11.3
Report Deletion Form

Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
182
_ _______________
Report Deletion Form
4.Drawing Manager
183
_ _______________
4.11.4
Report Approval Form

You can now approve drawings directly on the Revise Drawing form. However, the approval process described below can still be used. When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.
Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.
Options
Number The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record. Description The 40-character description of the report record.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve. The Report Approval form is displayed. 2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept. The Approval form is displayed.
184
_ _______________
For more information, see Approval/Revision Interface Form, page 186.
Report Approval Form
4.Drawing Manager
185
_ _______________
4.11.4.1
Approval/Revision Interface Form

The Approval form is displayed as part of the workflow for approving reports. First you specify the report to be approved on the Report Approval form. When you click Accept, the Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.
The first time a report is approved, only the Approved By field is active. All other fields are purely informational. The data displayed in these fields is read from the Revise Report form.
Fields and Options

Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Report Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Approved By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who approved the report. Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it. Revised By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who last revised the report. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
186
_ _______________
Revision Description Displays a short description of the revision. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Approval/Revision Interface Form
Checked By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who ran the report with the revised information. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Operating Sequence
1. On the Report Approval form, click Accept. The Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed. 2. Specify Approval/Revision Data Key in user initials in the Approved By field. Then click Accept.
4.Drawing Manager
187
_ _______________
4.11.5
Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.
Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.
Fields and Options

Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
188
_ _______________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create. The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. 2. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected; select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to submit the reports.
Report Multiple Submit Form
4.
5.
4.Drawing Manager
189
_ _______________
4.12
Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report Management Defaults form is displayed.
This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.
Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files. It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory. Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located. Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files. Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files.
190
_ _______________
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files. Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located.
Report Management Defaults Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data. The Report Management Defaults form is displayed. 2. Accept or Exit In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click Accept.
4.Drawing Manager
191
_ _______________
4.13
Approve Drawing
You can now use the Approval fields on the Revise Drawing form to approve a drawing instead of using the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still functional. This option activates the Approve Drawing form. It is used to input approval details for drawings and drawing revisions. First, the system displays the Drawing Types display list, as shown on the left. When a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the list of drawings of this type will be displayed, as shown on the right.
When a specific drawing is selected and confirmed for approval, the Drawing Approval form is activated.
This form displays the approval and revision fields which are used to store approval information about drawings and revisions. The Approval Status is automatically not approved when the drawing is revised and the approval details are not updated.
192
_ _______________
The first time a drawing is approved only the Approval Initials field is displayed. Once a drawing has been approved, all of the other revision fields will be displayed.
Approve Drawing
Commands
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Controls the automatic generation of title block information for the drawing being aproved. The default setting for this toggle is Load Title Block. The toggle is only active if the ASCII file that defines the text nodes in the title block resides in the project directory. For more information, refer to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 42.
Field Descriptions
Approved By Key in the initials of the person who approved the drawing or revision. Revision Number Displays the revision number as specified in the Create Drawing or Revise Drawing forms. Last Revision Displays the last revision number. Revised By Displays the initials of the person who last revised the drawing. Checked By Displays the initials of the person who checked the revisions performed on the drawing. Revision Description Displays the short description of the changes to the drawing as specified in the Create Drawing or Revise Drawing forms.
4.Drawing Manager
Steps
1. Select the Approve Drawing option from the Drawing Manager form. The system activates a Drawing Types display list. 2. Select Drawing Type Select a drawing type, and select Accept. The system displays a list of the existing drawings in the selected type. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be approved, and select Accept. The system activates the Approval/Revision Interface form.
193
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 4. 5. Key in the approval information for the report. Accept the approval information. The system processes the information and automatically stores the date and time when the drawing was approved. Drawing Approval Status Updated The system returns to the list of drawing views so that you can select another drawing for approval. 6. Select Cancel to exit the form.
194
_ _______________
5. Graphics Environment
This chapter provides information on all of the pull-down menus in the graphics environment with the exception of the Drawing pull-down menu options. Drawing This pull-down provides access to the Composition and Annotation options. Each of these options are described in their own chapter. For more information about Composition, refer to Composing Drawings, page 227; Annotation is discussed in Annotating Drawings, page 293. View This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands result in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model. File This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot drawings or select another drawing.
Graphics Environment
Element This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the Element Information settings box. Settings This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used during a graphics session. User This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your system such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
5.Graphics Environment
195
_ _______________
5.1
Drawing
These commands allow you to compose and annotate drawings.
Commands
Composition Activates the palette of Composition commands. Refer to Composing Drawings, page 227 for the discussion of these commands. Annotation Activates the palette of Annotation commands. Refer to Annotating Drawings, page 293 for the discussion of these commands.
196
_ _______________
5.2 View
These commands provide view manipulations. All of these commands result in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model. Each pull-down command is detailed in its own section of this chapter.
View
Command Groups
Viewing Activates a palette of viewing options. Viewing, More Activates another palette of viewing options. Viewing Direction Activates a palette of viewing direction options that allow for rotation of the view. View Depth Activates a palette of view depth options that change the depth of the view. Open/Close Lets you open or close a view. The items in the sub-menu are view numbers. The view numbers that are marked are open. Bottom-to-Top Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view is fully obscured before this item is chosen. Cascade Stacks views in numerical order iwth the lowest numbered view entirely visible and the title bar of each remaining view visible. Tile Tiles open graphics views. Swap Swaps the screen image between two logical screens. When Swap is chosen, the physical screens are updated with the contents of the previously hidden logical screen. This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if it does not support two virtual screens.
Update Updates a view, all of the views, the right or left view or the grid displayed on a view. Previous Lets you view the previous viewing operation. Next Lets you view the next viewing operation. This is only valid after Previous.
197
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Copy Copies the content of one view into another specified view. Camera Turns on the camera and defines the camera position and target. On turns the camera on. Off turns the camera off. Set Up turns on and sets up the camera. Move Camera moves the camera (like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views of it). Move Target moves the target (like standing in one position and pointing the camera at different objects). Lens opens the Camera Lens setting box, which is used to set the angles and focal lenths of view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button. Render Renders views in one of the following ways: wiremesh, hidden line, filled hidden line, constant, smooth, phong, phong stereo, or phong antialias. Also, FlyThrough activates the FlyThrough Producer setting box, which is used to create simple animations, called sequences, for visualizing 3D models.
198
_ _______________
Levels Defines which levels are displayed in a view. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button. Rotation Opens the change view rotation box, which is used to control view rotation. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.
View
199
_ _______________
5.2.1
View Commands
These commands are the basic view modification commands that are available from the View palette.
Commands
Window Center Defines a new center point for a window view. Window Area Defines a window viewing area by two data points. Viewing Options Sets the screen display and view control options. See Viewing Options, page 201 for more information. Zoom In Changes the magnification to focus on a smaller display area. Zoom Out Changes the magnification to focus on a larger display area. Fit Displays all elements in a selected view. Drawing Categories Review or modify the displayed category data (segregation parameters) associated with a screen view. See the Drawing Categories, page 203 section for more information. Set Reference Categories to Predefined Overrides user-specified reference category selection for that drawing view, and uses system default reference categories for that drawing view instead.
200
_ _______________
Viewing Options
This command activates the Viewing Options form used to update the screen display, set forms to display on the right or left screen, and set the view control options.
Viewing Options
Commands
Update Both Select to update both the left (back) and right (front) display screens. Update View Select and place a data point in the window view to be updated. Update Left Select to update the left screen only. Update Right Select to update the right screen only. Copy View Copies a selected view display from one window to another. Swap View Changes a selected view from either the right or left screen display. View On Activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1 4) on the right screen and the window views (5 - 8) on the left screen.
Select the window view to be turned on by placing a data point on the displayed window view option(s). View Off Select and place a data point in the window view(s) to turn specified view(s) off.
201
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Level Symbology On Enables the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology. Level Symbology Off Disables the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology. Reload Reference Symbology Reloads the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology. Form Right Screen/Form Left Screen Sets forms to be automatically displayed on the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. If prompted to... Select Source View Do this: Place a data point to identify the drawing view as the source to be copied. Place a data point to identify the window view(s) to receive the copied drawing view.
Select Destination View(s)
202
_ _______________
5.2.1.1 Drawing Categories
This command activates the Drawing Categories form. This form is used to review, revise, add, and remove drawing categories for a selected view.
Drawing Categories
Options
Review/Revise Reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selected view. Add Adds drawing categories (display levels) to a selected view. Remove Removes drawing categories (display levels) from a selected view.
203
_ _______________
5.2.1.1.1
Review/Revise Category
This option reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selected view. This option is activated by default.
If prompted to... Select View
Do this: Select the view for which you wish to revise/review categories. Select the categories to be turned off in the selected view. Categories set ON for display will be highlighted, and those set to OFF for display will not be highlighted. Accept the selected (highlighted) categories. OR Select Cancel.
Accept or Select Category
204
_ _______________
5.2.1.1.2 Add Category
Add Category
This option activates the Add Drawing Categories form. It is used to add drawing categories for display in a selected view. You can specify that all graphics be turned on for display, or that only specific categories be turned on.
Commands
All Drawing Graphics Add all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view. Hidden Line Graphics Add only hidden line categories for display. If prompted to... Select Category Do this: Select the categories to turn on in the drawing view. OR Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn on all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view. OR
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to add only hidden line categories for display. Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display the added categories.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and select other categories to be added.
205
_ _______________
5.2.1.1.3
Remove Category
This option removes the drawing categories that are turned on in a selected view. The categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
Commands
All Drawing Graphics Turns off all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view. Hidden Line Graphics Removes only hidden line categories for display. If prompted to... Select Category Do this: Select the categories to turn off in the drawing view. OR Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn off all of the drawing graphic categories in a selected view. OR Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to remove only hidden line categories from the display. Select View Place a data point to identify the view for category removal.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and select more categories to be removed.
206
_ _______________
5.2.2 View, More Commands
These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by using the View, More command.
View, More Commands
Commands
Update Left Updates the screen display for the left virtual screen. Update Right Updates the screen display for the right virtual screen. Update All Updates the screen display for both left and right virtual screens. Update View Updates the screen display for the selected window view. Align View Aligns two views so that they display the same volume. Copy View Copies one view to another view. View On Turns on selected screen views. View Off Turns off selected screen views. View Toggle Turns On or Off the display of any of the eight screen views. Move Up Moves you (pans) up in the selected view. Move Down Moves you (pans) down in the selected view. Move Left Moves you (pans) left in the selected view.
Move Right Moves you (pans) right in the selected view. Level Symbology On Displays reference models with the active reference model symbology. Level Symbology Off Disables the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology.
207
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Weight Display Toggle Toggles the line weight in the selected view to 0 or to the weight of the graphic symbology of the graphics within the view. Grid On/Off Toggles the grid on and off in the selected view.
208
_ _______________
5.2.3 Viewing Direction
These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by selecting Viewing Direction.
Viewing Direction
Commands
Rotate View - Element Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element. Rotate View - Absolute Rotates a view to a specific orientation. Rotate View - Relative Rotates a view counterclockwise about its center. Rotate about Z Axis Rotates view about the Z axis. Rotate about X Axis Rotates view about the X axis. Rotate about Y Axis Rotates view about the Y axis. Rotate View by 3 Points Rotates a view as specified by data points. Match Planar Element Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element. Dialog View Rotate Activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.
209
_ _______________
5.2.4
View Depth
These commands are the basic view modification commands.
Commands
Set Active Depth Sets the active depth; key in the working unit value (relative to the current active depth) of displacement. Set Display Depth Specifies the front and back of a range in a 3D view to be displayed along the Z axis. Set Active Depth - Absolute Sets the active depth along the Z axis for a specified view. Set Display Depth - Absolute Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and back values which are the distances along the view Z axis from the global origin to the front and back planes of the desired view cube. Set Active Depth - Relative Sets the display depth for the active view, where depth is the distance, in working units, to move the active depth along the Z axis. Set Display Depth - Relative Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and back values which are the relative distance along the view Z axis from the front and back planes of the existing view cube to the front and back planes of the desired view cube. Show Active Depth Displays the active depth for a specified view. Show Display Depth Shows the display depth for a specified view.
210
_ _______________
5.3 File
These commands allow you to plot drawings, display the active options, select another drawing or do a file design.
File
Commands
Plot Allows you to select I/Plot parameters files, scale and rotation factors, active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue used to plot the drawing. File Design Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session. Exit Exits the design file. Active Options Defines the parameters that determine the drawing annotation modes for precision key-ins, activates the Plant Coordinate System or Design Volume Coordinate System, and sets connect point mode. Select Another Drawing Exits the active drawing and display a different active drawing design file without exiting the drawing environment.
211
_ _______________
5.3.1
Plot
The Plot command activates the Plot Drawing form that allows you to select I/Plot parameters files, scale and rotation factors, active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue used to plot the drawing.
Commands
Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Set toggle to submit the plot immediately or to delay submission for a more convenient time.
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Parameter Files Displays the available I/Plot parameter files. Queues Displays the available queues. If prompted to... Do this:
Accept to Submit, or Select Option Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your drawing. If no parameters file is selected, the drawing will be processed without one. Select a queue. If no queue is selected, the system will use the Default queue.
212
_ _______________
Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is Delayed to specify the time to submit the plotted drawing. Select Accept when all selections have been made. This commands Default Pre-defined Drawing Categories toggle is different from the default setting of the Plot Drawing command in Plot Manager.
Plot
213
_ _______________
5.3.2
File Design
The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current design session. This command saves: MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of the Piping Designer base form.
214
_ _______________
5.3.3 Exit
Exit
The Exit command is used to exit graphics and save all changes to the design file. Exiting a design file does NOT save the active parameters set in the file. To save the active parameters, you must use the File Design command.
215
_ _______________
5.3.4
Active Options
This command activates the Active Options form. It is used to control how the active drawing design graphics look when displayed on the screen. It specifies or changes the defaults for the Coordinate Label and Name Label orientation, determines connect points, and specifies the placement location of combination labels.
Modes
Drawing Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances for miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the drawings scale. For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are interpreted in terms of the drawing scale. PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDY delta northing distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale.
216
_ _______________
This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g. Copy Parallel by Distance). This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command. The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins are used with this option.
Active Options
Detail Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to define miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands for user-created details in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined active scale. For instance, you may place a line where the end points have been specified in terms of the selected coordinate system relative to a specific drawing. For drawing annotation in the Detail mode, the following distance key-ins are interpreted in terms of the selected scale. PDX delta X distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDY delta Y distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDZ delta Z distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDL delta X, Y, and Z distances in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDK an absolute distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected scale (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance keyin, "D=", such as Copy Parallel by Distance). This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.
217
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Drawing View Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to define miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the selected drawing views scale and orientation within the drawing. For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are interpreted in terms of the selected drawing views scale and orientation within the drawing. PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDY delta northing distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the "active drawing view" This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view. This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command. PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing view (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g. Copy Parallel by Distance). This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command. The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins are used with this option.
Commands
Plant Coordinate System / Design Volume Coordinate System If the coordinate toggle is set to Plant Coordinate System, the Plant Coordinate System is used to define the key-ins. If coordinate toggle is set to Design Volume Coordinate System, the coordinate system of the active design volume is used to define the key-ins.
218
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Active Options command from the bar menu. The system displays the Active Options form with the Drawing mode activated. 2. Select Option Select the Detail mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing annotation for user-created details in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined, active scale. OR Select the Drawing View mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to a specific drawing views scale. OR Leave the Drawing mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms the coordinate system with respect to the drawings scale. 3. Set the coordinate system toggle to Plant Coordinate System to define the key-ins in terms of the Plant Coordinate System. OR Set the coordinate system toggle to Design Volume Coordinate System to define the key-ins in terms of the coordinate system of the active design volume. 4. Set the connect point toggle to All Connect Points for the system to locate the connect points by numeric priority (CP1, CP2, ...). OR Set the connect point toggle to Nearest Connect Point for the system to locate the connect point closest to the cursor position when you press <D>. 5. Specify the appropriate placement location for placing a combination label by pressing <D>.
Active Options
All Connect Points/Nearest Connect Point If the toggle is set to All Connect Points, the system locates the connect points by priority (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press <R> to move to the successive connect points. Then press <D> to accept the location. If the toggle is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connect point closest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.
219
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 6. Select Cancel to exit the form.
220
_ _______________
5.3.5 Select Another Drawing
Select Another Drawing
This command activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to exit the active drawing and activate another drawing in the project without exiting the drawing environment. You can also exit the current design file and activate a different type drawing design file. The Drawing Selection form is also used to Copy From Another Drawing and Copy Another Drawing.
Steps
1. 2. Select File > File Options from the main menu bar. Select the Select Another Drawing from the <File Options palette. The system activates the Drawing Selection form with a list of available drawing types. 3. Select Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to be activated, and Accept the selected drawing type. The system activates a list of drawings for the selected drawing type.
4.
Select Drawing Select the drawing to be activated, and select Accept. The system exits the current drawing design file and displays the new active design drawing without exiting the drawing environment.
221
_ _______________
5.4
Element
The Element pull-down provides the Analyze command .
Analyze
The Analyze option opens the Element Information settings box, which is used to change the attributes of an element(s) and review design file data associated with them, such as geometry and database attributes. DO NOT use the Analyze command to change any properties of a PDS element. This feature should be used only as an investigative tool in PDS applications. It is permissible to use this command on non-intelligent, user-defined elements in the model file; however, use of this command should be limited to those elements. When the Analyze command is active and a single graphics element is selected, the displayed data pertains to that element. Use the Next command to display data on any nested elements. The element type is shown in the title bar. The type number is shown in the upper left corner of the settings box.
Refer to the MicroStation Users Guide for more information on the Analyze command.
222
_ _______________
5.5 Settings
The Settings commands provide the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used during a graphics session.
Settings
Command Groups
Colors Modifies the colors used in the graphics environment. Use the File Design command from the File palette to save your settings before exiting the design file. Each tile in the color palette represents a color in the active color table. To modify a color, you must first select it. The selected color has an enlarged tile in which its index number (0-255) is displayed. The view background color is in the lower right corner of the palette, denoted by "B." Double-clicking a tile opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to modify the color. Fonts Opens the Fonts setting box. To see a type sample for a font, select in the list box.
223
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Rendering Opens the Rendering Settings box, which is used to adjust rendering settings. It controls distance cuing, which determine how atmospheric fading is set in the view. You can also set the Fog Color in this dialog box, which can be used to create a realistic atmospheric haze.
224
_ _______________
5.6 User
These commands provide access to PDS help and to the user preferences and button assignment that are specific to your system.
User
Help
Displays Help for the PDS 3D products.
User Preferences
The User Preferences command changes things that apply only to your system such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
Button Assignments
The Button Assignments command changes digitizing tablet or mouse button assignments. You can change the 3D Data and 3D Tentative buttons assignments, as well as 10 cursor button assignments for cursor button menus.
225
_ _______________
226
_ _______________
6. Composing Drawings
Composing a drawing means defining the drawing views and placing them in their appropriate locations within the drawing. This is done using the Drawing Composition / Annotation command. Selecting this command activates the graphics environment. Several of the commands in the graphics environment have the same functionality as those found outside the graphics environment. For more information about the graphics environment, refer to Graphics Environment, page 195. These commands are used to create drawings and composite drawing views, create and copy drawing views, and specify the characteristics necessary to place (compose) drawings. Additionally, you can attach and detach reference files, and add, remove, and review model categories. These commands activate the same forms and functions as those used in the Drawing Manager non-graphical environment.
Composing Drawings
Topics
Create Drawing View Defines the drawing view by selecting a saved view definition, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume for a specifically defined named item. Create Composite View Creates a composite drawing view for a drawing by using multiple saved view definitions. Copy Drawing View Copies an existing drawing view to create a new view for the same or another drawing. Create Section View Creates section lines for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view. Create Composite Plan View Creates a composite plan view where the drawing view is composed from an elevation view. Compose Drawing Controls the placement and characteristics of drawing views (or composite views) within the drawing border.
6.Drawing Composition
227
_ _______________
6.1
Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or by setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifed named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.

Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels.
228
_ _______________
The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.
Create Drawing View
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238 for more information. Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 232 for more information. Define View Location Defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define View Location, page 239 for more information. Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use this command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form.
229
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project. View Name Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view. View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a new scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value used when the drawing was created. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number Do this: Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the drawing view to be created. Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the drawing view to be created. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form. Key in the view coordinates to define the clipping volume. (The system does not have to have the Low coordinates in the Low field and the High coordinates in the High field; the command will work properly as long as the coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.) OR Select the Named Item option to use the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 232 for more information. OR Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238 for more information.
Specify Drawing View Name
Select Drawing View Orientation
Specify Clipping Volume
230
_ _______________
Accept or Select Other Options Select Discipline or Exit Accept the displayed values. Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing view, and select Accept. When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models for the selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view.
Create Drawing View
Select Model
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.
231
_ _______________
6.1.1
Named Item
This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define the data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.

Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
232
_ _______________
Commands
Select By Model Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, the system will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component to use. The system will search the selected model for that component. Select By Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter the item number. The system will search the entire project for that component. If prompted to... Specify Component Number Do this:
Named Item
Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to the appropriate setting, then select one of the Number commands to specify a named item. See Named Item by Model, page 234 and Named Item by Project, page 236 for more information.
233
_ _______________
6.1.1.1
Named Item by Model

This toggle setting selects a named item in a specific model to define the delta coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.

Commands
Select by Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter the item number. The system will search the entire project for that component. Piping Component Number Defines the type of named item as a piping component, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Instrument Component Number Defines the type of named item as an instrument component, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
234
_ _______________
Equipment Number & Nozzle Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item. Select Model Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of the Number options.
Named Item by Model
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Select Area or Exit Do this: Select the area that contains the model that contains the named item, and select Accept. Select the model that contains the named item, and select Accept. Place a data point in the field left of the model-name display field, key in the appropriate item number for the component in the model and select and press <Enter>.
Select Model or Exit
Specify Component Number
235
_ _______________
6.1.1.2

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.

Commands
Select By Model Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, the system will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component to use. The system will search the selected model for that component. Piping Component Number Defines the type of named item as a piping component. Instrument Component Number Defines the type of named item as an instrument component. Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item. Equipment Number & Nozzle Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item with a nozzle item.
236
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed automatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume. Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Specify Component Number Do this: Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping Component Number, Instrument Component Number, Equipment Number, or Equipment Number & Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.
237
_ _______________
6.1.2
Saved View
This option creates a drawing view using a saved view to define the orientation, clipping volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models will not be filtered on the basis of the discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, will be available regardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view. When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement, the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing view is created. Otherwise, the reference models associated with the model at the time the saved model view was created are attached. You can revise the reference model attachments.

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form. A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling tasks. If prompted to... Select Discipline or Exit Do this: Select the discipline containing the model with the saved view, and select Accept. Select the area containing the model with the saved view, and select Accept. Select the model for the drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the saved view name for the drawing view to be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit
Select Model
Select Saved View
238
_ _______________
6.1.3 Define View Location
This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it automatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is specified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to the Drawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the Create Drawing View form.
Commands
Upper Left Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the drawing view border. Upper Right Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the drawing view border. Center Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border. Lower Left Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the drawing view border. Lower Right Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the drawing view border.
239
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
x1 Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. y1 Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. x2 Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. y2 Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Location Do this: Place a data point on the button representing the quadrant where the drawing should be placed.
240
_ _______________
6.2 Create Composite View
This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a composite view. A composite drawing view is a drawing view which is a composite of several model views with different clipping volumes. You can define the views in a composite drawing view by: Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume (cube) in the model design file. Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
Create Composite View
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
Commands
Orientation Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view. Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User.
241
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
Define Views Defines, revises, or rejects drawing views for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 244 and Define Composite Drawing With Saved View, page 246 for more information. Define View Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define View Location, page 239 for more information.
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Key in the composite drawing view number (short name - up to 24 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is unique within the project. Composite View Name Key in the view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view.
242
_ _______________
Composite View Scale The scale value specified when the drawing was created is automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing view. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number Do this: Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the composite drawing view to be created. Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the composite drawing view to be created. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 93 for more information. THEN Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view to be created. Accept or Select Another Option Select the Define View Location option to predefine the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. THEN Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view to be created. Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be attached.
Create Composite View
Select Drawing View Orientation
Select Individual Views
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.
243
_ _______________
6.2.1

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view.
Commands
Saved View Defines the clipping volume for a drawing view using a model saved view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for more information. Reject View Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Views Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. You may define up to ten views. Drawing View Volume Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. If prompted to... Specify Clipping Volume Do this: Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individual drawing views for the composite drawing view.
244
_ _______________
Key in each coordinate individually or select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volume for a drawing view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for more information. OR Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selected composite drawing view. Accept or Select Another Option Accept all of the view definitions.
When this form is confirmed, the system creates the composite drawing view in the database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for the first saved model view definition specified is used to position the composite drawing view during drawing composition. The system determines the location of the remaining reference file attachments for the corresponding saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment. The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is determined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used to define the viewing direction and the clipping limits. An example of a composite drawing view is shown below:
After creating the composite drawing view, the Attach Drawing View Models form is activated to attach reference models. Refer to Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for more information.
245
_ _______________
6.2.2
Define Composite Drawing With Saved View

The Saved View option on the Create Composite Drawing View form is used to specify a model saved view to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view being created. You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing View block is updated as each view is created.

The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified on the Create Composite Drawing View form in Drawing Manager. If prompted to... Select Discipline or Exit Do this: Select the discipline for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the area for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept. Select the model for the composite drawing view to be created, and select Accept. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models. Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and Accept the view definition.
Select Area or Exit
Select Model
246
_ _______________
6.2.3 Create Composite Drawing Views Example
You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views. Youll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look.
247
_ _______________
Before you create the composite drawing view, youll need to know the coordinates for all volumes to be used. Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for the volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
248
_ _______________
Create composite drawing view name and number:
1. 2. 3.
Select Create Composite Drawing View. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and confirm. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and confirm.
4.
Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to 24 alphanumeric characters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the project. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters). Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, and confirm.
5. 6.
249
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 7. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing view.
Define the views to be used in the composite drawing view:

1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite drawing view.
You can define the views in one of two ways: By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as specified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the clipping volume. By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
To define the views by specifying the clipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view. The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field.
2.
250
_ _______________
3. 4. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form. Accept the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved view:
Note that the saved views must already exist. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Saved View. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and confirm. Select the area that contains the saved view, and confirm. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and confirm. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and confirm. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing view. The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates this field. 7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Accept the form. The system updates the database.
6.
251
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 8. Exit the form that appears.
Attach the drawing view models, and complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2.
Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), then confirm. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing view, then confirm. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.
3.
4.
252
_ _______________
6.3 Copy Drawing View
Copy Drawing View
This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing view for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to be copied. When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a different drawing type, this command will attach the deisciplines as specified for the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager.
Field Descriptions
Source Data Drawing Type Displays the discipline of the active drawing. You may select a different source drawing type by placing a data point in this field. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number. You may select a different source drawing number by placing a data point in this field. View Number Selecting this field activates a view number display list that prompts you to select a view number for the specified source drawing.
253
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Destination Data Drawing Number Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawings which will receive the new drawing view. Drawing View Number Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. Drawing View Name Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new drawing view. Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Composition Options
Define Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing border and composes the drawing view automatically. Within the graphics environment, this option is only active when the source and destination view numbers are the same. See Define View Location, page 239 for more information. Do Not Compose Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The view will not be displayed in graphics. Compose Coincident Defines the composition point of the destination drawing view to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied from a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in the destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the source drawing is not defined, this option is not active. This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation option. See the Overlay Drawing, page 338 for more information. Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels.
254
_ _______________
The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.
Copy Drawing View
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
If prompted to... Select Drawing View
Do this: Select the Drawing View Number of the drawing view to be copied. Place a data point in the Drawing View Number: field and key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The view number must be unique within the project. If you key in a number currently in use, the system will display an error message informing you that the view number is not unique. Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: field and key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the new drawing view. Accept the form and copy the drawing view.
Specify Drawing View Number
Accept to Copy Drawing View
255
_ _______________
6.4
Create Section View

This command activates the Create Section Drawing View form. It is used to create section lines for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view. A fence shape is specified to define the clipping volume of the section view. You can specify the section drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifically defined named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.

If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created in the model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.
Field Descriptions
View Number Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project. View Name Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view. View Scale The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was created. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list. Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created. Drawing View Volume Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
256
_ _______________
Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
Create Section View
Commands
Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 232 for more information. Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238 for more information. If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number Do this: Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify this drawing view. Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe this drawing view.
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the five view orientation options from the center of the form to specify the orthographic view. Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fields from the center of the form, and key in the view coordinates to define the drawing view volume. OR Select the Named Item option to use the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. OR Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Accept or Select Other Options Select Discipline or Exit Accept the displayed coordinate values. Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing view, and select Accept. Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.
Select Area or Exit
257
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached. Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories. Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing to compose the section view. The section view is composed initially as a plan view. Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape to define the clipping volume of the section view. The fence points are axis locked automatically.
Identify Fence Points
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view volume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error message is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape exceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite drawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is redisplayed with the specified elevation view orientation.
258
_ _______________
6.5 Create Composite Plan View
Create Composite Plan View
This option activates the Create Composite Plan Drawing View form. It is used to create composite plan views where the drawing view is composed from an elevation view. You can specify the section drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifically defined named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the orientation.

If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created in the model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.
Field Descriptions
View Number Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the composite plan drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project. View Name Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified composite plan drawing view. View Scale The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was created. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list. Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created.
259
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Drawing View Volume Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
260
_ _______________
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1 color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0
Create Composite Plan View
If prompted to... Specify Drawing View Number
Do this: Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify this composite plan drawing view. Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe this composite plan drawing view.
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the four initial view direction options from the center of the form to specify the viewing direction. Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fields from the center of the form, and key in the view coordinates to define the drawing view volume. OR Select the Named Item option to use the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined named item to create the drawing view. OR Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Accept or Select Other Options Select Discipline or Exit Accept the displayed coordinate values. Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing view, and select Accept. Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached.
Select Area or Exit
261
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories. Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing to compose the section view. The section view is composed initially as a plan view. Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape to define the clipping volume of the section view. The fence points are axis locked automatically.
Identify Fence Points
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view volume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error message is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape exceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite drawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is redisplayed with the specified elevation view orientation.
262
_ _______________
6.6 Compose Drawing
This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement and characteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border. You can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with a series of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the drawing environment.
Compose Drawing
Field Descriptions
Number Displays the number (up to 24 characters) that identifies the drawing view. Name Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view. Scale Displays the scale of the drawing view. Composed Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.
Commands
Display / Snap / Locate These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list. Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display on the screen and on plotted drawings. Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference models.
263
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the reference models into the active file. Compose Drawing View Select to place the active drawing view within the drawing border. Reference Models Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models, add, remove, and review model categories. Refer to Reference Models, page 269 for more information. Delete Drawing View Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawing view for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection. The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the database files and deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from the drawing. It also detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view. Align Drawing View Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views. Refer to Align Drawing View, page 286 for more information. Revise View Data Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise View Data, page 288 for more information. Revise Orientation Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise Orientation, page 290 for more information. Unassigned Views Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you can choose a view to be composed. Refer to Unassigned Views, page 292 for more information. If prompted to... Select Drawing View Do this: Select the appropriatect drawing view number from the list of drawing views. Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawing views) to on or off, then select any other appropriate option.
Select Options
264
_ _______________
6.7 Compose Drawing View
This option lets you specify the origin at which to place the active drawing view within the drawing border.
Compose Drawing View
This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing category for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics. An example of a drawing view outline is shown in the following figure.
265
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views. The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the userdefined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User. The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels. The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and the coordinate label. These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used. Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used. The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used. The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager: level = 1
266
_ _______________
color = 0 (white) weight = 0 line style = 0 This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing category for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics.
Compose Drawing View
If prompted to... Identify Origin
Do this: Place a data point within the drawing border to locate the center of the drawing view.
Notes
When the Compose Drawing form is active, you can move any drawing view (or composite drawing view) within the drawing border. You can drag the outline of the drawing views to confirm that the views fit within the drawing border and do not accidentally overlap other drawing views. You can overlap another drawing view if necessary to show a detail view within an elevation view, for example. You can also confirm the drawing view scale and the size of the drawing border. The system will automatically define a display depth large enough to display the drawing view graphics.
267
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 To move a drawing view within the border file, snap to the outline (or any element) of the drawing view to be moved. Then drag the highlighted graphics to the preferred location and press <D> to accept the location. The move does not affect any annotation graphics associated with the drawing view. Therefore, you should not move the drawing view once the drawing sheet has been annotated with dimensioning, labels, etc. (You can use the Update Labels command to re-attach intelligent labels after moving or redefining a drawing view. However, this does not update dimensioning or dumb labels.)
268
_ _______________
6.7.1 Reference Models
This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It contains a list of the current reference models attached to the active drawing view. The form contains options that copy drawings, attach and detach models, and add, remove, and review model categories.
Reference Models
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models.

The active drawing view must be specified on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Number Displays one character to identfiy the discipline, and displays the model number. Description Displays the description assigned to the model. DSP SNP LOC Displays the models Display, Snap, and Locate toggle status.
Commands
Display / Snap / Locate These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list.
Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display
269
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 on the screen and on plotted drawings. Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference models. Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the reference models into the active file. Apply to Active / Discipline / All Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle settings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same discipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines. Copy Active Drawing Used to copy reference file attachments from the drawing views in the active drawing. Copy Another Drawing Copies reference model attachments from drawing view in the project. Attach Model Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view. Automatic Attach & Verify Automatically attaches reference files for the active drawing view. It displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of the selected drawing view volume. Detach Model Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletes the reference model entry). Reference Model Categories Reviews/revises, adds, or deletes model categories for the active reference model. Reload Reference Model Automatically reloads all selected reference models for a drawing view. If prompted to... Select Model Do this: Select a model from the list, then make any necessary revisions to the toggle settings, then select an option from the bottom of the form. OR Select Cancel to exit.
270
_ _______________
6.7.1.1 Copy Active Drawing
This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing View Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays the Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing view.
Copy Active Drawing
Commands
Field Descriptions
Drawing View Number Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawing on the Drawing View Selection form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form . Discipline/Model Name Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing View Number Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
271
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If prompted to... Select Drawing View Do this: Select the Drawing View Number that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing view. Select only those models that should not be copied. All unhighlighted reference models will be copied. Select Accept to copy the specified models. Select Model
272
_ _______________
6.7.1.2 Copy Another Drawing
This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays. After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which allows you to define models from a specific drawing model. After a drawing is selected and accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing views.
Copy Another Drawing
Commands
Field Descriptions
Drawing View Number Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawing on the Drawing View Selection form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View Selection form . Discipline/Model Name Displays the discipline and model name of the models available in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form. Drawing View Number Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
273
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If prompted to... Select Drawing Type Select Drawing Do this: Select the type of drawing to be copied. Select the drawing that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing. Select the Drawing View Number that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing view. Select only those models that should not be copied. All unhighlighted reference models will be copied. Select Accept to copy the specified models.
Select Drawing View
Select Model
274
_ _______________
6.7.1.3 Attach Model
This option is used to attach reference models to specified drawing views.
Attach Model
Field Descriptions
Discipline Displays the disciplines available for you to select. Area Displays the numbers that identify the areas found in the selected discipline. Area Description Displays the description of the areas found in the selected discipline.
Commands
Automatic Attach & Verify Automatically attaches reference files to the active drawing view. It displays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view. The system highlights the reference models which are already attached. Select Models / Attach by Area Controls method of model selection. When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the models with the drawing type specified in the Project Setup command. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. If the Project Setup command was not used, the system will display the model data categories that were active when each model was created. If prompted to... Select Discipline or Exit Do this: Select a discipline, and select Accept.
275
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select Area or Exit Select an area, and select Accept. When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the models with the drawing type specified in the Project Setup command. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. If the Project Setup command was not used, the system will display the model data categories that were active when each model was created. Select Model Select the model to attach to the drawing view. The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that are active in the selected models.
276
_ _______________
6.7.1.4 Automatic Attach & Verify
This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It is used to automatically attach reference files to the active drawing view. It displays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view. The system highlights the reference models which are already attached.
Automatic Attach & Verify
Commands
All Disciplines/Pre-Defined Disciplines The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filters the reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the Project Setup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the drawing view volume selected, regardless of the discipline. Propogated / Sparse Models Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this toggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propogated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propogated and sparse models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propogated and sparse graphics are included in the same model.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name Displays a list of the currently-attached models on the Reference Models form. If prompted to... Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and Accept Set the toggles to the appropriate settings. Do this:
277
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select Model Select the models from the displayed reference file list. Accept the reference models to be attached to the active drawing view. Accept or Select Additional Models
278
_ _______________
6.7.1.5 Detach Model
This option is used to detach reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
Detach Model
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Number Displays the discipline and model number for currentlyattached models. Description Displays the description for each of the currently-attached models. If prompted to... Select Model Do this: Select the reference models to be detached from the active drawing view. Accept the highlighted reference model as the model to be detached, or select another model.
Accept or Select Additional Models
279
_ _______________
6.7.1.6
Reference Model Categories

This option activates the Model Categories form. It is used to review, revise, add, and remove reference model categories for a selected view.
Commands
Review/Revise Reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayed in a selected view. Add Adds model categories (display levels) to a selected view. Remove Removes model categories (display levels) from a selected view. All Model Graphics Selects all categories on the display list to be either added or removed, depending on the action being performed. This option is only applicable for the Add and Remove commands. Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference Restricts the system to use either the selected model only, or all piping reference models. If prompted to... Select View Do this: Select a view for which you want to revise the reference model categories. Select another view, or revise the active categories in the display list. Active categories are highlighted, and the selected action will be performed on them when the form is accepted. Placing a data point on a category that is currently turned on will turn it off.
Select View or Revise Categories
280
_ _______________
Accept or Select Categories Accept the current revisions, or make further revisions to the status of the categories.
Reference Model Categories
281
_ _______________
6.7.1.6.1
Review/Revise
This option is the default option on the Model Categories form. It is already selected when the form is activated. It reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayed for a selected view.
Commands
Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference Restricts the system to use either the selected model only, or all piping reference models. If prompted to... Select View Do this: Place a data point to identify the view to be reviewed. All categories that are highlighted are turned on for display. Select another view, or revise the active categories in the display list. Active categories are highlighted, and the selected action will be performed on them when the form is accepted. Placing a data point on a category that is currently turned on will turn it off. Accept the current revisions, or make further revisions to the status of the categories.
Select View or Revise Categories
Accept or Select Categories
282
_ _______________
6.7.1.6.2 Add Category
This option is used to add drawing categories for display in a selected view. You can specify that all graphics be turned on for display, or that only specific categories be turned on.
Add Category
Commands
Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference Restricts the system to use either the selected model only, or all piping reference models. All Model Graphics Activates all model graphics categories so that they will be displayed. If prompted to... Select View Do this: Place a data point to identify the view to display the added categories. Select the categories to turn on in the view. Select another view, or select Restart and select other categories to be added.
Select Category Select View or Revise Categories
283
_ _______________
6.7.1.6.3
Remove Category
This command removes the model categories that are turned on in a selected view. The categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
Commands
Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference Restricts the system to use either the selected model only, or all piping reference models. All Model Graphics Turns off all model graphics categories so that they will not be displayed. If prompted to... Select View Do this: Place a data point to identify the view from which to remove categories. Select the categories to turn off in the view. Select another view, or select Restart and select other categories to be removed.
Select Category Select View or Revise Categories
284
_ _______________
6.7.2 Delete Drawing View
This option deletes the selected drawing view (or composite drawing view).
Delete Drawing View
If prompted to... Accept to Delete Drawing View
Do this: Select Accept to delete the selected drawing view and detach the MicroStation reference file attachments for the drawing view.
285
_ _______________
6.7.3
Align Drawing View

This option enables you to align two or more existing (composed) drawing views using an intelligent model graphic (such as a piping component or equipment nozzle) which is common to all views.
If prompted to... Identify Item
Do this: Place a data point to identify an item in one of the drawing views to be aligned. Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or press <R> to reject the item and make another selection. Snap to the border of the drawing view to be aligned, or select the desired view from the list on the form. Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or press <R> to reject the item and make another selection. When the highlighted item is accepted, the system displays two intersecting dotted lines connecting the identified component to the corresponding component in the view to be aligned.
Accept/Reject
Identify Drawing View to Align
Accept/Reject Drawing View
286
_ _______________
An example of the intersecting lines is shown in the following figure.
Align Drawing View
Accept/Reject Drawing View Alignment Press <D> to accept the displayed drawing view alignment, or press <R> to reject the alignment and view an alternative alignment. When the drawing view alignment is accepted, the system repositions the drawing view so that the selected component is positioned at the point of intersection of the displayed lines.
The system repeats the prompts until you accept an alignment.
287
_ _______________
6.7.4
Revise View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise the clipping volume and view scale of an existing drawing view (or composite drawing view) that has already been composed. When revising composite drawing view data, the form contains additional options for Orientation and Redefine Individual Views. Refer to Revise Composite Drawing View Data, page 112 for more information.

The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the current number for the selected view. You can key in a new one, if needed. View Name Displays the current name for the selected view. You can key in a new one, if needed. View Scale Displays the current scale of the selected view. You can change the scale by placing a data point in this field. The list of available scales will activate, and you will be prompted to select the desired scale. Drawing View Volume Displays the current clipping volume associated with the active drawing view. If prompted to... Select Attribute for Revision Do this: Select any field on the form for revision.
288
_ _______________
You can rescale the drawing view by selecting the View Scale field to activate the scale display list and selecting a new scale value. The clipping limits are also scaled as a result of this operation. To revise any of the drawing view volume coordinates, select the associated field and key in the new value. You can key in a negative value to specify a westing, southing, or elevation coordinate. The drawing view in the following figure illustrates an example of a revised clipping volume.
Revise View Data
Specify Drawing View Scale
Select a scale value from the display list.
When the view scale is revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View (or Composite Drawing View) entity so that any drawing view scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing for this drawing view can be updated. The system updates the clipping volume for the active drawing view to reflect the new coordinate settings.
289
_ _______________
6.7.5
Revise Orientation
This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the orientation for the active drawing view. The current orientation for the active drawing view is highlighted on the form.

The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the number that identifies the active drawing view. View Name Displays the name that describes the active drawing view. Degrees Rotated Key in the number of degrees you want to rotate the view. This field is only applicable when Rotated View is selected.
Commands
Rotate Drawing View: Model X, Model Y, Model Z Rotates the active drawing view around either the X, Y, or Z axis. This option is only applicable when Rotated View is selected. If prompted to... Select Drawing View Orientation Do this: Select one of the seven orientations from the form to specify the new orientation, or select Rotated View to activate the Model X, ModelY, or Model Z options. Then select an option to rotate the current orientation.
290
_ _______________
Keyin Angle (0-360) If the rotated view does not fall into one of the seven standard orientations, the orientation is displayed as Rotated View. A revised orientation example for a drawing view is shown below.
Revise Orientation
Key in the angle by which to rotate the drawing view about the selected axis. Positive values will rotate counter-clockwise, while negative values will rotate clockwise.
291
_ _______________
6.7.6
Unassigned Views
This option is used to assign previously-created unassigned views to a drawing. You can select a view to be composed from a displayed list. Any views selected from the list and left uncomposed will be unassigned and available for later selection.

Unassigned drawing views must have been previously created with the Project Planner. Refer to Project Planner, page 423 for more information about unassigned views.
Steps
1. Select the Unassigned Views option from the Compose Drawing form. The system activates the Select Unassigned Views form which lists all the unassigned views for each orientation. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the orientation of the unassigned view to be placed. Select the view to be assigned. Select Accept to return to the Compose Drawing form. Select Cancel to exit the form.
292
_ _______________
7. Annotating Drawings
These commands are used to place annotation graphics in the drawing to fully document the drawing views. You can also update existing labels to reflect changes to the model.
Annotating Drawings
7.Drawing Annotation
Topics
Mass Annotation Automatically labels one drawing view at a time. ASCII files control which object types are available for labeling, and how these objects are to be labeled. Place Labels Activates a form that is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate Label commands. If you prefer, you may still use the older Name Label and Coordinate Label commands to place your labels. Equipment Center Lines Automatically places center lines on equipment types that have been designated to receive them. ASCII files control which object types receive centerline labels, how these labels are placed. Update Labels Updates displayable attribute drawing labels and coordinate labels to agree with changes in the model. It can also be used to reposition labels or edit user-defined text in a label. Revision Markers Places a revision triangle or revision cloud on a drawing with the specified type of revision marker to be placed. Display Report Places a report in a drawing. It activates the Display Report form which contains a list of the available drawing reports. Place Cell Places a user-defined cell in a drawing. Place Text and Line Places user-defined text and leader lines.
293
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Overlay Drawing Attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active drawing to share drawing annotations between related drawings. Review Attribute Displays the attribute values of the identified piping component or segment, or of the selected equipment item or nozzle. It also displays selected attribute information for MDR, HVAC, and raceway components. This option displays user data associated with the identified element and PDS markers placed in the file. Measure Distance Measures the distance between any two components, or inquires the location of any component in terms of the projects Plant Coordinate System. Drawing Annotation Symbology Updates the active line weight, symbology, color, and text size values according to definitions made during project setup. Name Label Selects the type of label to be placed. This command is used to place annotation graphics, text, and labels on the drawing view. Coordinate Label Selects the coordinate values to be labeled and to specify the form of the coordinate label. Automatic Labels Labels one or more drawing views automatically with the specified type of label. It can also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component search criteria to restrict the elements to be labeled.
294
_ _______________
7.1 Mass Annotation
The Mass Annotation command allows simple, automatic placement of annotation labels on selected drawing views. You select from a list the drawing types and the objects to be labeled, then you select the desired type of label for each object.
Mass Annotation

Both the Reference Data Manager and the Project Administrator modules have setup issues that are concerned with the Mass Annotation command; both modules contain a form used to control aspects of automatic label placement. The form used in the Label Library Manager in PD_Data is used to control Mass Annotation settings for name labels, and the form used in PD_Project controls Mass Annotation settings for coordinate labels.
This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation command in PD_Draw: Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled? This option allows you to prevent labeling of objects that have already been labeled, if desired. If the setting to re-label values that are incorrect is used, the system will update the label value, then move on to the next label. Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled? Allows you to prevent labeling of objects only partially included within the drawing view. An option is provided to label only objects whose labeling point is within the bounds of the active drawing view.
295
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled? Allows you to prevent labeling of objects that would not be partially or totally visible after vector-hidden lines have been processed. Options include labeling of objects whose labeling points are visible, not labeling partially-hidden objects, and not labeling completely hidden objects. Each label definition form in the Label Description Library of Reference Data Manager has a Mass Annotation Data option. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide for more information. A Mass Annotation Data option is also available while defining drawing seed data or individual drawing files data in Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information. The Mass Annotation command uses Code List 31 (Object Type) to control some aspects of automatic label placement. The command is also dependent on the presence of the following ASCII files in the project directory: <yyy>_object.dwg (where yyy is eqp or in) labels.<xxx> (where xxx is the numerical code-listed value of the drawing types being annotated) These files control which object types are to be labeled, and which types of labels are placed on those drawing types. These files are described below, and sample files (applicable to drawing type 665) are delivered to the project directory. You will need to create similar files for each drawing type that you wish to be available in the Mass Annotation command.
Which object types in a given drawing view will be available for labeling by users of the Mass Annotation command?
The eqp_object.dwg file lists the equipment object types (ranging 120-140, as listed in Standard Note 31: Object Type) for which the Mass Annotation command allows you to place labels. The in_object.dwg file lists the instrumentation object types available to the Mass Annotation command. Object types other than those listed in Standard Note 31 will not be available for use by the Mass Annotation command. These files also specify the equipment parametric form numbers for each object available for Mass Annotation.
!Object Type Parametric Definition Forms !120 A001,A003 !Equipment Platform 124 A051 !Equipment Handrail 128 A015,A016 !Equipment Penetration 130 A041 !Equipment Stair 135 A021,A031 !Equipment Ladder 140 A061,A063 !Equipment Davit
296
_ _______________
How will specific object types be labeled?
The labels.<xxx> files are named such that the file extensions are the numerical code-listed values of the drawing types (from Standard Note 2000) being annotated. For instance, the delivered sample labels.665 corresponds with the drawing type delivered as Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details because that drawing type is defined as code 665 in Standard Note 2000. The labels.<xxx> files define which label numbers and search criteria apply to a particular object type (from Standard Note 31) in the particular drawing type being annotated. For each piping object type, there are two possible entries: one without search criteria and one with search criteria defined in Report Manager (PD_Report). For piping segments, only the longest segment for any given line ID will be labeled. Search criteria is valid only for piping object types. For more information on creating search criteria, refer to Search Criteria Data Form, page 165. The labels.<xxx> files follow the rules listed below: Name labels are specified by the number given to them in the Label Description Library. Coordinate labels are specified the character C. Labels can be placed individually or in combination according to the following convention: A comma (,) specifies single label placement; use a comma (,) between all single label specifications. Examples: the string 2, 7, 10 specifies that name labels 2, 7, and 10 are available for placement for that object type; the string 5, C specifies that the single name label 5 and a coordinate label (designated later in this list as C) are available for placement for that object type. A dash (-) specifies the availability of all the labels in the given range. Example: the string 10-15 specifies the availability of name labels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15 for that particular object. A plus (+) specifies the availability of a combined name label and coordinate label. Example: the string 5, 12+C specifies availability of name label 5, and the combination of name label 12 and a coordinate label. Note that the coordinate label portion of a combination label may be rejected by the Reject Label command, described later in this chapter, but the entire combination label will be rejected if the name label porton is rejected. SC = specifies availability of labels for piping items matching the given search criteria definition. Example: the string SC = YOUR_SEARCH_CRIT_NAME, 1, C specifies that all piping components meeting the given search criteria will receive both a name label 1 and a coordinate label.
Mass Annotation
297
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The sample labels.665 file is listed below:
!Drawing Type = 665 !ObjectType Search Criteria Number !!Piping Object Types 205 1 210 2, 7, 10-11, C 215 3 + C 217 8 220 13, 15 250 5 255 5 260 5 !Equipment Object Types 101 12 + C 110 6, C !EERWAY Object Types 300 17, C Label Numbers !Piping Segment !Piping Component !Piping Specialty !Pipes !Piping Support !In-Line Instrument !On-Line Instrument !Off-Line Instrument !Equipment Group !Equipment Nozzle !EERWAY Connect Point
The information in the above sample file controls label placement for both piping and equipment object types in drawings of type 665. For examples of the previously explained convention, refer to the line describing the labels to be placed for piping object type 210:
210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component
This type of piping component can be annotated by name labels 2, 7, 10, 11, and a coordinate label.
Options
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and the drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. (Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.) Label Placement Options Determine placement of the labels text along the leader line.
Above - Places the labels text above the leader line. Below - Places the labels text below the leader line. On - Places the labels text on the leader line, and places no character other than those in the labels text.
298
_ _______________
[On] - Places the labels text on the leader line, and between brackets. End - Places the labels text at the end of the leader line.
Mass Annotation
Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification feature. The letters on each button have the following meanings: L = left R = right T = top B = bottom C = center M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only) For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of text in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the label. Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information about text justification. Text Size Defines the label text size. Select the active text size from the list box or select Select From Label to set the active text size to that of an existing label.
Active Angle: Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set the With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.
299
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Horizontal Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal. Vertical Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical. Reject Labeling Point Rejects the default labeling point on the object being labeled. You will be prompted to specify a new labeling point. Reject Label Rejects the label being placed, places a rejected label marker indicating that the label has been rejected, and continues on to label the rest of the selected objects. The system places rejected labels on a level 63 (delivered as Mass Annotation Rejected Labels). The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will not attempt to replace a rejected label until the rejected label marker is deleted using the Delete Element command. Skip Current Label Bypasses the label being placed, and continues on to label the rest of the selected objects. The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will attempt to place a label at this same point. Continually selecting the Skip Current Label option will cycle through all possible mass annotation label placement points. Window Center to Item Shifts the window center to correspond with the placement point of the active object, centering the object on your screen. Active Working View Allows selection of the working view to be displayed. Select the number of the view you wish to be the working view for annotation. The view numbers are equivalent to the Microstation view numbers.
300
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Mass Annotation command from the Annotation palette. The system displays the Drawing Bounds form and prompts you to select the desired drawing view(s) to be annotated.
Mass Annotation
2.
Select the desired drawing view(s) you wish to annotate, then Accept the highlighted selections. The system displays the Select Object and Label Type form and prompts you to select an object type to be labeled.
301
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 3. Select the object type to be annotated. The system updates the form to display the object types available for mass annotation of the selected drawing type and prompts you to select labels for that object type, or to select another drawing type.
4.
Select the appropriate labels for the object types to be annotated, then Accept the highlighted selections and activate Mass Annotations Place Labels form. The system processes the mass annotation data, and activates a variation of the Place Labels form. You will be prompted to perform the next step in the label placement sequence for the type of label being placed. (If leader lines are available for that type of label, you will be prompted to place the second data point; the first label data point is label point 1 by default, as defined for that equipment in the Equipment Modeling module.)
302
_ _______________
5. At this point you may modify, reject, or skip the active label. To place and accept a label, place the desired data points to define the leader line, then Accept the active label. The system determines the next label placement point, and prompts you to perform the next step in the label placement sequence. The Mass Annotation command uses placement point 1 as the default placement point for labels leader lines. You can override this setting during placement.
Mass Annotation
303
_ _______________
7.2
Place Labels
The Place Labels command is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate Label commands found in previous versions of the Drawing Manager module. The Name Label and Coordinate Label commands are still available for you to use if you so prefer. Labels placed on equipment items that are not associated with a Datum Point may not act as expected when the Update Labels command is used. If the view scale is altered, or if the Datum Point is relocated, the label will maintain its previous distance and relationship to the Datum Point.
Options
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. Label Placement Options Determine placement of the labels text along the leader line.
Above - Places the labels text above the leader line.
304
_ _______________
Below - Places the labels text below the leader line. On - Places the labels text on the leader line, and places no character other than those in the labels text. [On] - Places the labels text on the leader line, and between brackets. End - Places the labels text at the end of the leader line. Coordinate Sequence Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values will be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this sequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for you to choose from.
Place Labels
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created prior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have been defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation. Supplementary Text Options You can specify that the coordinate label be created with supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which consists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the coordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix or suffix. Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawings seed data (Type 63) through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the system prompts for the text. The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for information on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
305
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Bottom of Pipe If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation. Face of Flange If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-offlange, so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle. Top of Steel If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do so, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-ofsteel. Top of Concrete If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. Top of Platform If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the elevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is supported. If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply: The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature. Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the platform which it describes. If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply: The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled. The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipments parametric shape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature. Bottom of Duct If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is the lowest elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. Text Drag Off/On Defines if the label text is placed using drag mode or not. After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept.
306
_ _______________
Def Line Style / Alt Line Style Set to designate use of the default or alternate line style. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. The centerline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this value differently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.
Place Labels
Line Term Off/On Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate label has a line terminator. The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the line terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a gap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line. The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB. Axis Lock On/Off When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis. Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and deactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices. Active Leader Line On/Off Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the selected label. You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerline extension without affecting name labels text, label enclosures, or line terminators. Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label Toggle to place a name label only, or to place a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. See Name Label, page 346 for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created with this command can be updated using the Update Labels commands. The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes between the text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label when updating the labels. The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representing the name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.
Add Label Below/Add Label Above Toggle used when placing name labels using the With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or below the coordinate label. With Active Angle/Along Leader Line Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be oriented along the leader lines last segment.
307
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification feature. The letters on each button have the following meanings: L = left R = right T = top B = bottom C = center M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only) For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of text in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the label. Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information about text justification. Text Size The Text Size fields display the text size that is to be used with the selected label. When a label is selected, the text size fields are automatically populated with the values that are to be used for that label. If the text size is read from the Label Description Library or from the Type 63 data, the Text Size fields are read-only. If the Text Size fields are populated with the active text size, the fields can be edited.
Active Angle Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set the With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.
308
_ _______________
Horizontal Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal. Vertical Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical. Coordinate Label Disables name label options on the form. Other Activates a list of other types of labels that may be placed.
Place Labels
The following four labels (between Coordinate Label and Other) are defined per drawing type in the lab_button.dwg file during project setup. This file resides in the project directory. A sample lab_button.dwg file is shown below:
# # # # # # # # # # # This file maps the command buttons on the Label Placement form in the Place Label Command to a Label Number in the Label Description Library. There are a set of special labels described below that do not refer to a specific label number but a set of labels. Special Label Number SP1, "Piping Line Number" SP2, "Component Tag" SP3, "Piping Reducer" SP4, "Piping Piece Mark"
# You May define a Maximum of 4 Label Numbers per Drawing Type # Define Drawing Type to Which Buttons Apply # Define Label Numbers and Text for Buttons # Label Number, Text to Display on Button # (MAXIMUM of 20 Characters) DrawingType=641 ! Plot Plans
309
_ _______________
12, 14, 50, 52, "Equipment Number" "Structural ID" "Dwg View Name" "Dwg View Scale" ! Equipment Arrangement Drawings DrawingType=643 12, "Equipment Number" 6, "Nozzle Number" 50, "Dwg View Name" 52, "Dwg View Scale" DrawingType=665 SP1, 5, 6, 12, "Piping Line Number" "Instr. Tag Number" "Nozzle Number" "Equipment Number" ! Instrument Location Plans
DrawingType=731 SP1, 5, 6, 12,
"Piping Line Number" "Instr. Tag Number" "Nozzle Number" "Equipment Number"
As shown in the sample file, the DrawingType=xxx line (where xxx is the drawing type number found in Standard Note 2000) begins a button definition for a drawing type. You may define up to 4 buttons per drawing type by using the label type number from the Label Description Library, followed by a comma (,), followed by the desired button text in quotes. If a drawing type is not defined in the lab_button.dwg file, the following default buttons (the SPx buttons listed in the lab_button.dwg file above) are used: SP1: Component Tag SP2: Line Number Label SP3: Place Flow Arrow SP4: Piping Piecemark Four buttons will always be present on the form in this area. Defining fewer than 4 buttons per drawing view will result in the defaults listed above being used for the unspecified buttons. For example, defining only two buttons for a drawing type will result in the 2 userspecified buttons, plus the remaining default Place Flow Arrow and Piping Piecemark buttons being available on the form.. Nozzle Number Places a nozzle number label. You will be prompted to identify the nozzle being labeled.
310
_ _______________
Piping Line Number Places a piping line number label. You will be prompted to identify the line being labeled. Equipment Number Places an equipment number label. You will be prompted to snap to the equipment item being labeled. Instrument Tag Number Places an instrument tag number label. You will be prompted to identify the instrument being labeled. Category Type Options Allows selection of specific label category types for label. Options include Piping/Equipment, Electrical Raceway, Structural, PLANTGEN, Miscellaneous, Drawing View, and User Input. The types of labels listed in each option depend on settings in the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager module. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide for more information on Label Description Library and setting up labels. More information on these options can also be found at Name Label, page 346 . Specific Labels Allows placement of specific label types. Options include Piping Line Number, Component Tag, Piping Reducer, Piping Piecemark, Flow Arrow, Drawing View Scale, and Drawing View Name labels. Define Active Leader Line Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the Active Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the defined active leader line with the label.
Place Labels
Move Label Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line). Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text, or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire.
311
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to identify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Modify Label This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be modified. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they are restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also, this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator ON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified, regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their previous settings upon the command being exited by any means. If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing leader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a leader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not include a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option. When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" of the component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for the remaining vertices of the leader line. For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader line and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select. If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position once you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the label will not be revised as part of adding the leader line. You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or two segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data point. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The leader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point is placed. If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data point placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the nearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is moved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text, both the leader line and the text are moved.
312
_ _______________
If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will automatically be rotated to that orientation. This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing and the location of the component in the model being labeled. You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and select Accept on the displayed leader line.
Place Labels
Delete Element Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels. This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a single text element. This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the Mass Annotation command. Edit Text This option allows you to edit the part of a label that was entered directly at placement. You will be prompted to identify the label that you wish to edit. The Edit Text command will edit user defined text but will not resize the label enclosure if placed with the User Input label type. If the label is to be edited, the correct steps would be to delete the label and replace it with the correct text. The new label enclosure will be sized correctly. The deletion step is not needed if the user defined label does not include a label enclosure. Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information. Add Coordinate Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. Add Name Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously created label to be used for creating a name label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the name label. The system automatically creates the name label and associates the two labels. Both labels can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the two labels are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
313
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 See Name Label, page 346 for more information.
Steps
1. Select the Place Labels command from the Update Labels palette. The system activates the Place Label form, and prompts you to select the desired labeling option. 2. Select the desired type of label, then select any additional options you wish to use to modify the label being placed. For example, you may select the sequence of coordinate display for coordinate labels; you can also adjust the text size, justification, and termination options for name and coordinate labels. After selecting the desired label and its settings, Accept the selections. You will be prompted to identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label. 3. Identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label. For labels which allow line terminators, you will be prompted to specify all remaining vertices for the line terminator. When all terminator vertices have been specified, you will be prompted to accept the leader line or reset the form. 4. Specify all remaining vertices for the line terminator, then Accept the selections. The system places the label, and prompts you to select another label to be placed.
314
_ _______________
7.3 Equipment Centerlines
Equipment Centerlines
This command activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form, which lets you place or revise centerline labels for equipment items in orthogonal views. This command is limited to the labeling of parametrics only; equipment obects defined as primitives will not be labeled. Parametrics with primitives added to them will be labeled by this command.
Centerlines will only be placed in orthogonal views. They will be placed for equipment which has been rotated about one axis (or not rotated at all), but equipment which has been rotated about two axes will not receive centerline labels. Centerline labels behave like any other kind of labels; they have associativity with respect to the equipment group to which they apply. This means that they respect the Update Labels command in the following situations: If the equipment group is moved, the centerline will be moved when the Update Labels command is next used. If the equipment group is deleted, the centerline will be deleted when the Update Labels command is next used. The Update Labels command will not be respected for centerline labels in the following situations: If the equipment group has been rotated since the label was placed.
315
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If the parametric form for equipment group has been modified (after equipment placement). If either of the above situations occurs after centerline label placement, you will need to delete and replace the centerlines for the applicable equipment groups.

Before the Equipment Centerlines command can be used, the eqp_center.dwg file must be edited to control centerline placement according to your specifications. The eqp_center.dwg file (delivered to the project directory) controls which equipment objects receive centerline labels. In addition to listing the objects which may be labeled with this command, this file also specifies the following attributes: Which views of the objects will be labeled. Multiple centerlines for specified objects. Which data points on the equipment object through which the centerline label will be placed. The direction of the centerline. The length of centerline labels extension beyond the graphical extents of the equipment object. The symbology of the centerline label. A sample eqp_center.dwg file is excerpted below:
UNIT= INCH !Form View CL DP !No Type No No Direction ! E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 2 DP1 SEW PS 1 DP1 VERT PT 1 DP1 VERT E210 ST PS PT E215 ST PS PT 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 DP1 DP1 DP1 DP1 DP1 DP1 DP1 DP1 SNS SEW VERT VERT SNS SEW VERT VERT Annotation Category 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ! top ! side ! front ! top ! side ! front ! top ! side ! front
Extension 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
316
_ _______________
Using the first equipment type shown as an example, each field in the file format will be described.
UNIT= INCH !Form View CL DP !No Type No No Direction ! E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 2 DP1 SEW PS 1 DP1 VERT PT 1 DP1 VERT Annotation Category 3 3 3 3 ! top ! side ! front
The presence of the parametric form number of a given equipment type (form number E205 in this example) specifies that the command will recognize all equipment objects of that type as recipients of a centerline label.
Extension 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375
Each line of the file describes how centerline labels will be placed for one view of that equipment parametric. To place more than one centerline in that view, simply add another row of keywords under the same parametric form number as shown in the example above. The rest of the fields in the file are explained below. Field UNIT= Description The units of measure that will apply to the centerline extension values. The possible values for this field are INCH for inches, and MM for millimeters. The equipment parametric form number from which centerlines are being defined. Each parametric form number in this file can receive centerline labels. This field will be empty if this line describes the second (or more) centerline definition for that equipment parametric form number. The type of object view (top, side and end view) for which centerlines are being defined. The keywords Primary (P), Secondary (S), and Tertiary (T) describe the axis of the equipment placement orientation tee. For example, PS is the plane that includes the primary and secondary axis of the equipment group. This field will be empty if this line describes the second or third centerline for a given equiupment form in a given drawing view. The number of the centerline being specified by this row of the file. The first (or only) centerline for the given view of this parametric form number is number 1, and the second centerline for that drawing view is specified by the number 2. The datum point through which the centerline will be placed. For example, DP1 will be the datum point 1 of equipment.
Form No
View Type
CL No
DP No
317
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Direction Direction of centerline. The possible values for this field are: PNS PEW SNS SEW EPT EST ETT HOR VERT Plant north-south Plant east-west Site north-south Site east-west Equipment primary tee Equipment secondary tee Equipment tertiary tee Horizontal Vertical
NORMAL-CLi Normal to previously defined centerline number i in the same view type, where normal is the plane of the view type being defined. A dash (-) is required between the NORMAL and CLi keywords. DPi-DPj Parallel to a vector from DPi to DPj, where the DP values correspond to data points on equipment items.
Extension
The default length that the centerline should extend beyond the graphic range of the equipment being labeled.
Annotation category The user-defined drawing annotation category number that applies to the centerline graphic symbology. The User-Defined Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager command of the Project Administrator (PD_Project) module of PDS controls graphic symbology. The number placed in this field should correspond with the listed position of the category assigned to centerline graphics. For example, the centerline graphic category in the project from which the sample file was taken is the third category in the list of user-defined drawing annotation categories, which means that it is number 3. Any text preceded by an exclamation point (!) will not be processed by the system; this allows users to place comments inside the file.
318
_ _______________
Commands
Place Centerlines by View Prompts you to select the view to be processed by the command. Select the view, then select Accept to place centerlines for that view. Place Centerlines by Group Activates an Equipment Number field, which allows you to specify the number of the equipment upon which you wish to place centerlines. Key in the desired equipment number or snap to the desired equipment, then select Accept to place centerlines for the specified equipment in all drawing views.
Extend Centerline Allows you to extend the centerlines that have been placed. After selecting this command, place a data point on the centerline that you wish to extend. Move the end of the centerline label to the desired location, then place a second data point to accept the new centerline extension. Delete Centerline Allows deletion of the existing centerlines. After selecting this command, snap to the equipment containing the centerline which you wish to delete. Select Accept (or place a data point) to delete the selected centerline. Delete Element Allows deletion of existing label elements. After selecting this command, place a data point on the label element which you wish to delete, then place a second data point to accept deletion of that element. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a single text element.
Steps
1. Select the Equipment Centerlines command from the Annotation palette. The system activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form and promts you to select the drawing view for which you wish to place centerline labels. (The default action for the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form is Place Centerlines by View.) 2. Select the view for which you wish to place centerline labels. Select Accept to place centerlines on all equipment groups allowed in the view OR Specify the desired equipment group by using the Place Centerline by Group option, then select Accept to place centerlines on the specified equipment group.
319
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 3. Use the remaining commands to modify or delete existing centerline labels as necessary.
320
_ _______________
7.4 Update Labels
Update Labels
This command activates the Update Labels form used to update displayable attribute drawing labels and coordinate labels to reflect changes in the model. Labels can be updated by selected view or by identifying a specific label in the view. This option is also used to reposition, modify, delete, and partially edit or completely replace user-defined labels. This command does not delete associative name labels or coordinate labels when both of the following conditions have been met: The range of the component in the model continues to intersect the volume of the corresponding drawing view. The range of the name or coordinate label (including the text and the leader line) continues to intersect the space within the drawing that is enclosed by the corresponding drawing views skeleton. The Update Labels command updates name labels on the basis of the Reference Database under any of the following conditions: When changes to the applicable alphanumeric data in the model have been made. When changes to the definition of the format for that name label type in the Label Description Library have been made. When the label attributes listed in the Label Graphic Data form of the Label Description Library are modified. Such items include line weight, line style, color, character size, and several other label attributes. When the definition of the label enclosure for that name label type was revised in the Label Description Library. When the selection of underlining for the text within that name label type has been revised in the Label Description Library. For instance, if the name label was created at a time when the Label Description Library specified no underlining for the labels text, but the definition has been changed, the name label is updated. If the text for the name label was created with underlining and the Label Description Library has been revised, the name label is updated. In all cases when the underlining option has been enabled, the length of the underlining will be corrected when the length of text within the applicable name label is updated. When one of the labeled attributes (such as a coordinate) has been changed. Equipment must be defined with a datum point for labels to update on primitive graphics. The Update Labels command also updates equipment centerlines placed with the Equipment Centerlines command. It will update the centerline position if an equipment group has been moved or deleted. It will not update the centerlines for a group that has been rotated, or if a modification has been made to the corresponding parametric form. In either of these cases, the centerline should be deleted and replaced after the modification.
321
_ _______________
Selecting the Restart command near the top of the form will highlight all available views. Otherwise, you may select the desired view(s) from list on the form, or you will be prompted to identify them in the drawing.
Commands
Create Revision Labels/Do NOT Create Revision Labels Controls the creation of revision labels. If this option is activated, the system will maintain a copy of any name or coordinate label that is updated or deleted. These revision labels can be displayed inside revision clouds or revision triangles on orthographic drawings. When this option is enabled, a copy of the previous version of the name or coordinate label is made in the following instances: The text for a name or coordinate label is updated in the drawing on the basis of changes in the database or movement of the labelled component. A name or coordinate label is deleted in the drawing because the labelled component has been deleted from the model. The label format has been changed during the project life cycle. Update Labels cannot distinguish between a label being moved as a result of a component being moved in the model and a label being moved because a drawing view was repositioned for the sake of drawing composition. Therefore, if you select this option after moving a drawing view, all name and coordinate labels will be copied as updated labels.
The revision labels will be identical to the drawing labels except that:
322
_ _______________
The weight for a revision management label will be two (2) greater than the weight of the corresponding drawing label. The color of a revision management label will be zero (typically white). They will be assigned to the same drawing category as defined for the "hidden" vectorhidden-line graphics for that drawing view. This will allow creation and deletion of these labels to be managed according to drawing view. Only the labels text will be copied as a revision management label; the leader line and any enclosures will not.
Update Labels
Since a drawing can have no more than 64 drawing categories, it is necessary to share the category for the optional "hidden" vector-hiddenline graphics. Because of this, users should coordinate creation and deletion of hidden graphics with the use of revision management labels. Axis Lock Off/On When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis. Update Selected Views Updates all the labels in the specified view. Update Single Labels Updates the specified drawing label(s) to reflect the current status of the model. Move Entire Label Repositions the drawing label(s) in the drawing view, but does not update the text. Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or to move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. Move Text Only Repositions the drawing label text in the drawing view. Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Modify Label This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be modified.
323
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they are restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also, this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator ON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified, regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their previous settings upon the command being exited by any means. If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing leader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a leader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not include a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option. When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" of the component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for the remaining vertices of the leader line. For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader line and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select. If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position once you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the label will not be revised as part of adding the leader line. You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or two segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data point. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The leader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point is placed. If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data point placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the nearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is moved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text, both the leader line and the text are moved. If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will automatically be rotated to that orientation. This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing and the location of the component in the model being labeled. You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayed leader line.
Delete Element Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels. This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset.
324
_ _______________
This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a single text element. This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the Mass Annotation command.
Update Labels
Delete Revision Labels Deletes revision management labels from all or selected drawing views. Place a data point on the drawing view containing revision management labels to be deleted. The selected drawing view will be highlighted. To select all drawing views, place a data point on each one. When the form is accepted, the revision management labels for the selected drawing view(s) will be deleted. Although revision management labels share the drawing category with "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics, deleting revision management labels will not affect the "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics. However, re-creating vector hidden-line graphics will delete all graphics on that level, including revision management labels, for the active view.
Revise Text Select to completely replace user-defined label text. Refer to Revise Text, page 326 for more information. Edit Text Select to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the label. Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information. If prompted to... Do this:
Accept/Select Update Labels option Select the desired option from the bottom of the form. The move options are used to reposition the drawing label(s) in the drawing view, but do not update the text. Snap lock mode is automatically activated with this command and the previous snap lock mode is restored when exiting this command by any means. This option provides the features of the Move Entire Label option and the MicroStation Modify Element command. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap) Place a data point on (or snap to) the desired label. Identify Element or Accept for Last Label Place a data point on the element of the label to be deleted.
325
_ _______________
7.4.1
Revise Text
This option completely replaces the part of the label that is user-defined text. This option is also used to replace text in a non-associative label which was created with the MicroStation Place Text command. You cannot revise labels which are completely formed from attribute data or predefined text.
Steps
1. 2. Select the Revise Text option from the Update Labels form. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap) Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be revised. 3. User Defined Text Label - Keyin Text Key in the text string to replace the user-defined portion of the identified label. If the name label being revised is associative, the system re-prompts for the text. The system substitutes the entered text for the user-defined part of the label. The label is re-formed based on the attribute data and the label definition in the Label Description Library. An error message is displayed if the label text was created from formatted attribute data and predefined text. For associative name labels, this requires a change to the data structure of the label in order to include the position and length of the user-specified text within the label.
326
_ _______________
7.4.2 Edit Text
This option is used to edit partially a part of the user label. It cannot be used to edit text in a non-associative label created with the Place Text command. This command does not replace any text formed from attribute data or predefined text.
Edit Text
Steps
1. 2. Select the Edit Text option from the Update Labels form. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap) Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be edited. 3. Keyin text to be replaced in label Key in the text string to be replaced from the user-defined portion of the identified label. 4. Keyin replacement text Key in the text string to replace the specified string, and select Accept to process the specified edit. If the name label being edited is a user-input associative label, the system prompts for a substring to search in the labels text and the substring with which it is to be replaced. Only a substring of the user-defined part of the label is substituted through this option. It does not replace any text formed from attribute data or predefined in the Label Description Library. For named labels, only name labels with a user-defined attribute defined as part of the label in the Label Description Library can be edited with this command. You can use MicroStation commands to delete or add graphics to the label as long as the additions are added to the label graphic group.
327
_ _______________
7.5
Revision Markers
This command activates the Revision Markers form, and is used to place a revision triangle or revision cloud on a drawing.

The graphic parameters for the revision triangle or revision cloud must be previously defined in the Label Description Library. Label number 205 is reserved for revision triangles. Refer to the Create Label Graphic Data section in the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide to define the graphic parameters. The PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide defines the color codes and line weights.
Commands
Draw Revision Cloud Defines the type of revision marker as cloud. Draw Revision Triangle Defines the type of revision marker as a triangle. Move Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line). Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
328
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Revision Markers command. The system activates the Revision Markers form. 2. Select Revision Option Select the type of revision marker to be placed from the Revision Markers form. To place a revision triangle, go to step 3. OR To place a revision cloud, complete steps 4 through 7. 3. Specify Triangle Location Place a data point to specify the location for the revision triangle to be placed on the drawing view. The system places a triangle at the specified location and places the drawing revision number (retrieved from the drawing RDB) in the triangle. 4. Specify Arc Start Point Place a data point to indicate the starting point for the first arc in the cloud. 5. Specify Arc Curvature Place a data point to indicate a point on the arc. 6. Specify Arc End Point Place a data point to indicate the end point for the arc. The system displays the defined arc. 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to define all the arcs which form the cloud. A revision cloud is treated as a closed element. When you snap to the initial start point for the end point of an arc, the placement is complete.
Revision Markers
329
_ _______________
7.6
Display Report
This command activates the Display Report form. It contains a list of reports for the active project. You can display a report by selecting it from the list, and the report can be placed in a drawing using the Place Report in Drawing option. Graphic parameters such as color, weight, and character size for the report can be set in the Project Data Manager under graphic symbology data for drawings.
Commands
Move Element Moves a placed cell. Delete Element Deletes a placed cell.
Steps
1. 2. 3. Select the Display Report command from the panel menu. The system displays the Display Report form with a list of the reports. Select Report Select the report to be displayed from the list on the Display Report form. 4. Accept or Select Other Report Accept the highlighted report, select another report. The system displays the report on the Display Report form.
330
_ _______________
Display Report
You can view the displayed report by using the arrows in the center of the form to move left and right and the scroll bar to move up and down. 5. Select the Select Another Report option to redisplay the report list for selection and display of another report. OR Select the Place Report in Drawing option from the Display Report form to place the displayed report in the drawing view.
6.
Key in the required Max Blank Lines and Space Factor values. When you generate a report, there can be sections with blank lines. Max Blank Lines limits the number of blank lines to the specified value when you place the report in a drawing. Space Factor sets the spacing between the lines in the report. The default spacing is set in Project Administrator.
331
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Select the desired Report Position to specify the report placement parameters. These parameters set the justification when you place the report in a drawing. 7. Data Button will Place Report Place a data point in the drawing view to specify the location of the report being placed. The justification is from the data button in the view.
332
_ _______________
7.7 Place Cell
Place Cell
This command is used to place user-defined cell into a drawing. The cells name, which does not display in the form, and the cells description needs to be defined in a Drawing Annotation Cells List, dwg_cell_list, in the project directory. Each cell name, followed by the description, must be on a separate line and at least one space must separate the cell name from the description. The description is limited to 60 characters. Blank lines and comment lines beginning with an exclamation point (!) in the first column may be placed anywhere in this library. Because cells placed with MicroStation do not respect the PD_Draw pre-defined category settings, attempting to move or delete cells placed through MicroStation may cause unpredictable results. It is recommended that all desired cells be added to the PD_Draw cell library (and added to the dwg_cell_list file) and placed through the PDS Place Cell command.
Commands
Move Element Moves a placed cell. Delete Element Deletes a placed cell.
Field Descriptions
Active Scale Key in the active scale for the cell. Active Angle Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Horizontal Defines the orientation for the cell as horizontal.
333
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Vertical Defines the orientation for the cell as vertical.
Steps
1. Select the Place Cell command. The Place User Cell form displays. 2. 3. 4. Select the cell to place. Define the Active Scale and Active Angle if you want. Place the cell in the drawing.
334
_ _______________
7.8 Place Text and Line
This command is used to place user-defined text labels that are not associated with data from the RDB. You define the text to be displayed, as well as the following text (and line) attributes to be used for display: Drawing category Line Style Line Weight Text Height Text Width Text Weight Orientation Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data Manager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text. Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will only apply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once another drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attribute values will no longer be active.
Place Text and Line
335
_ _______________
Commands
Line Style Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a graphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it will replace the currently-displayed line style. Justification Options Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification feature. The letters on each button have the following meanings: L = left R = right T = top B = bottom C = center M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only) For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of text in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the label. Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information about text justification. Horizontal/Vertical Places the text parallel to the horizontal or vertical plane. (These options are mutually exclusive.) Place Line Active Angle Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the active angle. Place Line Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the angle determined by the endpoints. Place Text Prompts for the user-defined text, then places it at the active angle at the point selected.
336
_ _______________
Move Element Allows movement of selected elements. Place a data point on the element to be moved, then move the element to the desired location. Place a second data point to select the new location of the element, then hit the Reject/Reset button to accept the new placement and finish the operation. Delete Element Allows deletion of selected elements. Place a data point on the element to be deleted, then place a second data point to accept the deletion of the selected element.
Place Text and Line
Field Descriptions
Active Angle Displays the current active angle at which the text (and line, if applicable) will be displayed. Enter Text Accepts the user-defined text that will be placed. This field will display up to 40 characters at once, although more can be entered into the field. Weight Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Height Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Width Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Weight Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. If prompted to... Select Category Do this: Select the category to which the text and line attributes will be assigned.
337
_ _______________
7.9
Overlay Drawing
This command attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active drawing to share drawing annotation between related drawings. Only the drawing annotation categories from the overlay drawing is displayed. Category display changes made using the Drawing Categories command for the active drawing also updates any overlaid drawings.
Steps
1. Select the Overlay Drawing command. The Overlay Drawing Annotation form displays. 2. Select Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the list and Accept. A list of available drawings for that drawing type displays.
338
_ _______________
Overlay Drawing
3.
Select Drawing(s) and Accept Select the drawings to overlay and Accept.
339
_ _______________
7.10
Review Attribute
This command activates the Review Attribute form. It is used to display the attribute values of the identified piping component or segment, attribute values of the selected equipment item, and attribute values of the selected equipment nozzle. It displays information on the selected attribute for ModelDraft, HVAC, and raceway components. It also reviews the user data associated with the element and the information associated with the PDS markers placed in the model.
Steps
1. Select the Review Attribute command from the Annotation palette. The system activates the Review Attributes form. 2. Identify Element The system displays the attribute values from the database for the selected element. 3. Select Cancel to exit the form.
340
_ _______________
7.11 Measure Distance
This option activates the Measure Distance form, used to for measuring distances between any two components (piping, equipment, structural, etc.) or inquiring the location of any component in terms of the projects Plant Coordinate System.
Measure Distance
Commands
Reference Point Select this option to define from which point to start measuring from. Keypoint Snap / Project Snap If set to Keypoint Snap, tentative points go to the nearest element keypoint. The number of element keypoints can be changed using the ky= MicroStation key-in. If set to Project Snap, tentative points connect to the element where they are placed. Measurement Point Defines the point being specified as the point to measure to.
Field Descriptions
Delta Easting Displays the easting distance between the two points. Delta Northing Displays the northing distance between the two points. Delta Elevation Displays the elevation distance between the two points. Absolute Displays the actual distance between the two points.
341
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Measure Distance command from the bar menu. The Measure Distance form displays. 2. 3. Define the Keypoint Snap / Project Snap toggle. Specify Reference Point or Select Other Option Identify the point to measure from. The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the reference point displays in the left message field. 4. Enter Measurement Point or Select Other Option Identify the point to measure to. The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the measurement point displays in the right message field. The distance between the two points displays.
342
_ _______________
7.12 Drawing Annotation Symbology
This option activates the Drawing Annotation Symbology form. It is used to update the active line weight, symbology, color, and text size values by selecting from the displayed list. This command can be used to more easily control the graphic parameter setup prior to the creation of miscellaneous drawing annotation using MicroStation placement commands. You can use Project Manager to specify the named category and the associated graphic parameters (including line terminator, text font, and text line spacing) in the Reference Database. Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data Manager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text. Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will only apply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once another drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attribute values will no longer be active.
Drawing Annotation Symbology
Commands
Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification feature. The letters on each button have the following meanings:
343
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 L = left R = right T = top B = bottom C = center M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only) For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of text in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the label. Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information about text justification. Line Style Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a graphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it will replace the currently-displayed line style.
Field Descriptions
Weight Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Height Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Width Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered. Text Weight Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this field will allow a different value to be entered.
344
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Drawing Annotation Symbology command from the bar menu. The system displays the Drawing Annotation Symbology form with a list of the predefined drawing annotation categories. 2. Select Category Select a category to use. The system displays the message Active Placement Data Updated. 3. 4. Define any overrides values you want to use. Select Cancel to exit the form, or select and accept another drawing annotation category to be updated.
Drawing Annotation Symbology
345
_ _______________
7.13
Name Label
This command activates the Name Label form, and is used to place annotation graphics, text, and labels on the drawing.
The list of name labels available for placement can be restricted on the basis of drawing type. This is done in Project Setup; refer to this section found later in the document for more information. The Project Data Manager module controls whether or not the Leader Line ON/OFF and Line Terminator ON/OFF options are available for use. For more information, refer to Project Data Manager. The graphics for the name label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS Drawing category of name labels. The graphic parameters and label text contents for the label type are defined in the Label Description Library. Refer to the PDS Piping Reference Database Users Guide for more information on category assignments and label descriptions. The system places name labels in a drawing with capitalized text regardless of how the data is stored. Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data Manager.
346
_ _______________
Mechanics Placing Name Labels in Circular Enclosures
When placing name labels with circles, make sure the text height is small enough to fit inside of the circle. The circle does not open if the text height is too large.
Name Label
The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a circle or a circle with a bisector: You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label Description Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter is undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice. If the labels text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for that label, the labels text is center-justified in circle. If the labels text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle defined for that label, the labels text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle and the right side of the circle is opened for the text. If the labels text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The text that precedes the dash will be placed above the bisector, and the text that follows the dash will be placed below the bisector. The dash itself is not included within the label. A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the labels text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator). The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label. ("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of characters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager, the default extension of .25 times the average text width.
Placing Name Labels in Rectangular Enclosures

The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a rectangle: The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the labels text for that specific label - not the maximum length of the labels text, as defined in the Label Description Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width unless a userdefined extension is used. The labels text is left-justified for multi-line labels. A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the labels text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator).
347
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label. ("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of characters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager, the default extension of .25 times the average text width.
Placing Name Labels to Identify Equipment Groups

When you want to place a name label on an equipment group that is a parametric shape (defined through Equipment Eden), snap to an element within the parametric shape. The associative linkage, which uniquely identifies the parametric shape within the equipment group, and the key point that identifies that element will be used to associate (and update) the label with the equipment group. If the Equipment Eden definition for a parametric shape is modified after a label has been associated with it, the associativity between the element and the label may be lost. In this case, you will need to delete the label and place a new one. If the parametric shape is deleted and replaced, a new associative linkage will be assigned, and subsequent use of Update Labels will automatically delete the label. This feature has no effect on labels associated with nozzles, since nozzles have well-defined connect points. If the equipment group was placed using primitive shapes, the gruop will have no associative linkage, and you must associate the label with the equipment groups attribute linkage by placing a data point on the appropriate element. Therefore, it is recommended that you create equipment groups using Equipment Eden as much as possible.
348
_ _______________
Commands
System label selection: Select Component Tag, Piping Line Number, Piping Piecemark, or Piping Reducer to label a specific item within a drawing view. Drawing View Scale Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing view scale. Drawing View Name Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing view name.
Name Label
You can specify the drawing view for which the drawing view scale or name label applies by snapping to the outline graphics for the drawing view or by identifying a design element in the drawing view. Unless specifically notified (by a message), these labels can all be updated with the Update Labels command. User label selection
Select the Drawing View option or one of the four discipline (Piping/Equipment, Structural, PLANTGEN, Electrical Raceway) options, and specify the type of label from a display list associated with the selected option to place user-defined labels. Select Miscellaneous to place labels from the Miscellaneous list defined in the Label Description Library of Reference Data Manager (PD_Data). Refer to the description of the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on creating labels with user-specified text. Select User Input to place a label with text to be specified as the label is created. Select the label from the display list and key in the text string, which remains active until you select a different label type or select the Restart button. To key in a two line label, key in a backslash "\" in the text string where you want the second line to start. This user-specified text is respected by the Update Labels command. Refer to the description of the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on creating labels with user-specified text. Text Drag Off/On Defines if the name label text is placed using drag mode or not. After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept from the pocket menu.
349
_ _______________
Place No Leader/Place Leader Line Defines if the label is placed with a leader line or not. When no leader line is placed, and the drag mode is enabled, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. Def Line Style / Alt Line Style Set to designate use of the default or alternate line style. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. The centerline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this value differently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager. Line Term Off/On Defines if the leader line terminator displays or not. Once the label is placed in the drawing, both the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line and the Line Term Off/On options remains in effect until you do one of the following: Change the option for either the leader line or the line terminator. Select a different label type. Select an option that results in a different list of label types being displayed. Select the Restart button. Exit the command. Select one of the following options within the Place Name Label command: Define Active Leader Line Move Label Move Text Only
350
_ _______________
Modify Label Delete Element Place Flow Arrow Add Coordinate Label
Name Label
Axis Lock Off/On When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of name labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis. Active Leader Line On/Off Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the selected label. You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerline extension without affecting name labels text, label enclosures, or line terminators. Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label Toggle to place a name label only, or to place a name label and a coordinate label as one operation. Following the placement of the name label the system activates the Coordinate Label form. Refer to Coordinate Label, page 358. Both the name label and the coordinate label created with this command can be updated using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes between the text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label when updating the labels. The text representing the coordinate label is created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels. The text representing the name label and the remaining graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for name labels. Add Label Below/Add Label Above Toggle used when placing name labels using the With Coordinate Label option to specify whether the coordinate label is placed above or below the name label. With Active Angle/Along Leader Line Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be oriented along the leader lines last segment. Coordinate Label Activates the Coordinate Label form. This form allows you to place coordinate labels. Refer to Coordinate Label, page 358 for more information.
351
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
Horizontal Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal. Vertical Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical.
352
_ _______________
Define Active Leader Line Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the Active Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the defined active leader line with the label.
Name Label
Move Label Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line). Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text, or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to identify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Modify Label This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be modified. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they are restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also, this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator ON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified, regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their previous settings upon the command being exited by any means.
353
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing leader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a leader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not include a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option. When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" of the component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for the remaining vertices of the leader line. For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader line and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select. If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position once you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the label will not be revised as part of adding the leader line. You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or two segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data point. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The leader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point is placed. If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data point placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the nearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is moved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text, both the leader line and the text are moved. If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will automatically be rotated to that orientation. This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing and the location of the component in the model being labeled. You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayed leader line. Delete Element Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels. This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a single text element. Place Flow Arrow Select and place a data point to identify the pipe to be labeled with a flow direction arrow. Then press <D> to accept the highlighted pipe. You can place a flow arrow (including bi-directional flow arrows, where applicable) in any drawing view if flow for the drawing was defined in the design file. If flow has not been defined for the specified pipe, a message is displayed informing you that the flow
354
_ _______________
direction is undefined. Place a data point to specify the origin for the flow arrow symbol.
Name Label
Add Coordinate Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
The flow arrow symbol must be defined in active cell library for the drawing as in the delivered cell library. The system projects this point to the centerline of the pipe and places the flow arrow. Flow arrows can also be placed during automatic label placement. If drag mode is enabled, the flow arrow will be oriented in drag mode on the basis of the direction of flow in the model and the drawing views orientation. Edit Text Select this option to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the label. Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information. Add Name Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously created coordinate label to be used for adding a name label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system automatically creates the name label relative to the witness line of the identified coordinate label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
355
_ _______________
Steps
At any point in the operation of this command, you can set the character size or define the label orientation. 1. Select the Name Label command. The system activates the Name Label form. 2. Select the desired label option to be used to place name labels from the Name Label form. Identify Component Place a data point to identify the item to be labeled such as a pipe, component, piping line, or drawing view border for view scale or name labels. 4. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted item, or press <R> to reject the item and make another selection. 5. 6. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired. To place element labels and miscellaneous annotation labels, continue with Step 7 to identify the vertices of the leader line. OR Go to Step 9 to place drawing view and drawing scale labels. 7. Enter Data Pt 2 Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from the identified component to the label location. The leader line rubber-bands, following you to the next data point. You can press <R> to back up and replace the previous vertex. (For example, the first data point defaults to the location point identified in Step 4, so the first prompt asks for data point 2. If you press <R> the system prompts for data point 1 enabling you to specify the starting vertex of the leader line.) 8. Accept Leader Line or Reset Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location. (For example, if Accept is used when only one vertex of the leader line has been defined, the active label orientation is used to place the label with no leader line. When no leader line is present, you can place the label in drag mode.)
3.
356
_ _______________
An example of element labels placed using a leader line to set the label location is shown below.
Name Label
Some labels are defined in the label description library to have no leader lines. For these labels the system only prompts for the location of the text.
9.
Enter Label Location Place a data point in the view to identify the location of the drawing view name, drawing scale label, or other label.
10.
Select the desired option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or delete name labels placed in the drawing view(s).
357
_ _______________
7.14
Coordinate Label
This command activates the Coordinate Label form. It is used to label the coordinates at a specified location, to select the coordinate values to be labeled, and to specify the form of the coordinate label. These options may require frequent changes depending on the density and configuration of data within the area being labeled. Most coordinate labels can be updated to reflect changes in the model, or to be realigned with a drawing view which was modified. Refer to Update Labels, page 321 for more information. However, coordinate labels placed in non-PDS models are non-associative. A warning is displayed indicating that the coordinate label will not be moved, updated, or deleted automatically by the Update Labels command on the basis of any changes to the corresponding non-PDS model. Since the coordinate value(s) to be labeled reflect the active PDS Coordinate System, the graphics for the coordinate label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS Drawing category for coordinate labels. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PD Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on category assignments and label descriptions. Until you revise the default values in Project Data Manager, the Coordinate Label command uses the following symbology options: The default line style of coordinate label witness lines is solid (0). The alternate (centerline) line style for coordinate label witness lines is dashed (4). Any coordinate label with no prefix or suffix defined will be displayed with the text height and width for coordinate labels without supplementary text. Any coordinate label with a prefix or suffix defined will be displayed using the text width, height, and weight determined by the prefix/suffix supplementary text option. There will be two spaces between the prefix or suffix and the coordinate value. Any leading or trailing blanks defined in the prefix or suffix will be automatically removed prior to forming the coordinate label. The line spacing for labels with multiple lines is determined from the RDB data for the drawing. For previously-created drawings, the default is the present function of text height. Placement of a coordinate label without a leader line is based on the active MicroStation text/text node justification.
358
_ _______________
Coordinate Label
Commands
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and the drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button. (Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.) Label Placement Options Determine placement of the labels text along the leader line.
Above - Places the labels text above the leader line. Below - Places the labels text below the leader line. On - Places the labels text on the leader line, and places no character other than those in the labels text. [On] - Places the labels text on the leader line, and between brackets. End - Places the labels text at the end of the leader line.
359
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Coordinate Sequence Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values will be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this sequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for you to choose from.
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created prior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have been defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation. Supplementary Text Options You can specify that the coordinate label be created with supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which consists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the coordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix or suffix. Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawings seed data (Type 63) through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the system prompts for the text. The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PD Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation. Bottom of Pipe If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation. Face of Flange If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-offlange so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle.
360
_ _______________
Top of Steel If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do so, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-ofsteel. Top of Concrete If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. Top of Platform If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the elevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is supported. If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply: The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature. Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the platform which it describes. If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules will apply: The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled. The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipments parametric shape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature. Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the platform which it describes Bottom of Duct If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is the lowest elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. Text Drag Off/On Defines if the coordinate label text is placed using drag mode or not. After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode. Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged text, select Accept from the pocket menu. Def Line Style / Alt Line Style Set to designate use of the default or alternate line style. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. The centerline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this value differently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.
Coordinate Label
Line Term Off/On Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate label has a line terminator.
361
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the line terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a gap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line. The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB. Axis Lock On/Off When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for placement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked to a drawing axis. Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and deactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices. Active Leader Line On/Off Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the selected label. You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerline extension without affecting name labels text, label enclosures, or line terminators. Coordinate Only/With Name Label Toggle to create a coordinate label only, or create a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. Following the placement of the coordinate label, the system activates the Name Label form. See Name Label, page 346 for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created with this command can be updated using the Update Labels commands. The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move, modify, and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination label distinguishes between the text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label when updating the labels. The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representing the name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on the MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.
Add Label Below/Add Label Above Toggle used when placing name labels using the With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or below the coordinate label. With Active Angle/Along Leader Line Set to With Active Angle to specify that the label text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify that the text be oriented along the leader lines last segment. Name Label Activates the Name Label form. This form allows you to place name labels. Refer to Name Label, page 346 for more information. Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text relative to its origin.
362
_ _______________
Coordinate Label
Horizontal Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal. Vertical Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical. Define Active Leader Line Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the Active Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the defined active leader line with the label.
363
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Move Label Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. After setting the toggle to the desired setting, select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line). Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle is Move Entire. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Modify Label This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be modified. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they are restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also, this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator ON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified, regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their previous settings upon the command being exited by any means. If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing leader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a leader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not include a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option. When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" of the component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for the remaining vertices of the leader line.
364
_ _______________
For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader line and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select.
Coordinate Label
If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position once you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the label will not be revised as part of adding the leader line. You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or two segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data point. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The leader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point is placed. If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data point placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the nearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is moved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text, both the leader line and the text are moved. If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will automatically be rotated to that orientation. This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing and the location of the component in the model being labeled. You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayed leader line. Delete Element Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels. This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or partial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the element to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset. This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed. If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected, you may delete a single text element. This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the Mass Annotation command. Add Coord Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the component being labeled.) Then, place a data point to specify the label location. The system places the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
365
_ _______________
Steps
At any point during the operation of this command you can set the character size or define the label orientation. The line spacing for the labels is 0.25 times the active character size. You can select RESET at any time to identify another item or select another label type. 1. Select the Coordinate Label command. The system activates the Coordinate Label form. 2. Select the desired coordinate Label Graphics option to specify the placement location on the leader line for the coordinates. The active option is highlighted. 3. 4. Select one of the Supplementary Text Options. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of special text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the system prompts for the text. Select from the display list to specify the supplementary text to be added to the coordinate label. OR Select the text block, and key in the desired supplementary text. These special text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PDS Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation. If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation. If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. For bolted nozzles, the connect point location is at the face-of-flange so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument component, or a nozzle. If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
5.
366
_ _______________
If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic. 1. 2. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, Elevation) corresponding to the type of coordinate label to be placed from the bottom of the form. You can select any combination of coordinates. The active coordinate label is displayed in the message area. 3. Identify Coordinate Location Place a data point over an element or snap to a keypoint to identify the label location. 4. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element, or press <R> to reject and make another selection. 5. Enter Data Pt 2
Coordinate Label
Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from the coordinate location to the label location. You can press <R> to back up and replace the previous vertex. The leader line rubber-bands, stretching with you until the next data point is placed. 6. Accept Leader Line or Reset Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location. For the Label Only graphics option, the system only prompts for the location of the text. The system places the label at the specified location.
367
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Examples of coordinate labels placed with and without supplementary text:
7.
Select an option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or delete coordinate labels placed in the drawing view(s). The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).
8.
Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.
368
_ _______________
7.15 Automatic Labels
This option selects label(s) to be placed automatically in one or more drawing views. It can also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component search criteria to automatically label only certain elements. The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a circle or a circle with a bisector line as the label enclosure.
Automatic Labels
You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label Description Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter is undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice. If the labels text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for that label, the labels text is placed center-justified with respect to the center of the circle. If the labels text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle defined for that label, the labels text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle and the right side of the circle is opened for the text. If the labels text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The top line is the text that precedes the dash and the lower line is the text that follows the dash. The dash itself is not included within the label. In determining whether or not the text fits within the circle, .25 times the text width is added to the length. The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a rectangle as the label enclosured. The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the labels text for that specific label - not the maximum length of the labels text, as defined in the Label Description Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width. The labels text is left-justified for multi-line labels. Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data Manager.
369
_ _______________
Commands
Active Leader Line Off/On Set to On to place the leader line defined with the Define Active Leader Line option on either the Coordinate Labels form or the Name Labels form. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for the selected label. Search Crit Off/On Set on to use a specific search criteria defined with the Define Search Criteria option which restricts the elements to be automatically labeled based on database attributes. Label Fence Contents Places a fence and labels the items inside the fence. The Label Fence Contents command is discussed in the next section. Define Component Search Criteria Initiates a search for specific components, and labels those that are found. The Define Search Criteria command is discussed in Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158 . Orient Active Label Specifies the angle at which the label will be placed. You may select Horizontal, Vertical, or key in the angle. If prompted to... Do this:
Select Drawing View and/or Label Type Select the drawing view(s) to be labeled from the Drawing Views list at the top of the form, then select the label type(s) to be placed from the Label Types list. Select Accept to process the request. The system places the specified label(s) at a location near the low or high range of the labeled item and displays the message Automated Label Placement Complete.
370
_ _______________
You can use the Move Label or Modify Label option in the Update Labels, Name Labels or Coordinate Labels commands to move the labels after placement.
Automatic Labels
371
_ _______________
7.15.1
Label Fence Contents

This option is used to define a specific portion of a drawing by placing a fence to automatically label the fence contents. The depth of the fence is controlled by the depth of the drawing view. You can annotate groups of components that require similar label types and leader line configurations.
Steps
1. 2. Select the Label Fence Contents from the Automatic Labels form. Identify First Fence Point Place a data point to identify the starting location of the area to be fenced for labeling. 3. Identify Second Fence Point Place another data point in the opposite corner to complete the fence. 4. Select Drawing View and/or Label Type Place a data point to select the label type to be placed, and select Accept. The system automatically places the selected label within the fenced area, and displays the message Automated Label Placement Complete.
372
_ _______________
7.15.2 Search Criteria - Component Form
When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation form or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no search criteria (that is, no restrictions all component attributes are reported). The most commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.
373
_ _______________
Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code and Fabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Other option is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for each category, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support. When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom of the form.
When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list of associated attributes is displayed.
374
_ _______________
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed as a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, select the appropriate button.
Fields and Options

Component Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been defined. Commodity Name Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity name attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Commodity Code Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity code attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Fabrication Category Restricts the reported components by means of the frabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification. Component Group Number Restricts the reported components by means of the component group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification. Tag/Component Number Restricts the reported components by means of the tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
375
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Other Displays the entity options. Piping Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Instrument Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Piping/Tubing Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Pipe Support Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes that are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code list value to complete the specification. Clear ALL Component Search Criteria Deletes the restricted component attributes once they have been defined. Insert Search Definition Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria to the specification. Remove Search Definition Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria. To remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, and click Accept. Clear Search Criteria Removes the complete search criteria specification. Select this option and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Component Search Criteria. The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed. 2. Select Attribute Select an attribute to be restricted. The available operator options are displayed. 3. Select Operator
376
_ _______________
Select an operator from the displayed options. 4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. For all other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then click Accept. 5.
377
_ _______________
378
_ _______________
8. Update Annotation Labels
Update Annotation Labels
This command is very similar to the Update Labels command that is available in the graphics environment of Drawing Manager (PD_Draw). Update Annotation Labels uses the same rules to update labels that are used in the Update Labels command. Refer to Update Labels, page 321 for more details. Selecting this command activates the Update Annotation Labels form, which prompts you to select the drawing type for which you wish to update annotation labels.
8. Update Annotation Labels

Selecting and accepting a drawing type from this list activates the list of available drawings of the selected drawing type.
379
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Selecting and accepting a drawing from the list activates the Update Annotation Labels job submission form. The Update Annotation Labels activity may be submitted immeditately, or you may delay submission until a specified day and time. To submit the job immediately, leave the toggle in its default position: Submit Immediately. To specify a delayed submisison, switch the toggle to its Submission is Delayed setting, and specify the desired day and time. When the batch job is processed, it will create three log files in the temp directory: udl_log.<drawing type number> contains the environment variables set for the batch process dlupdate.<drawing type number> contains the report of which drawings were updated and which were not dlquelog.<drawing type number> contains messages for any errors that may have been encountered while processing the drawings being updated The file extension for each of these log files is the code-listed drawing type value for the drawing view being processed. For example, the log file extension for files associated with the drawing type delivered as Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details would be 665, as that drawing type is number 665 in Standard Note 2000 (Drawing Type).
380
_ _______________
9. Vector Hidden Line Manager
This command activates the Vector Hidden Line Manager form. It is used to create hidden-line-removed graphics for a specified drawing. The graphics can be created with visible lines only, or you can create the graphics with both visible and hidden lines. There is also an option for including or removing reference models. Optional queues, besides the default queue, can be created and defined. Refer to the Queue Setup section for more information. First, the system displays the List of Drawing Types and prompts you to select a drawing type. Once a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the system prompts you to select a drawing from the List of Drawings.
Vector Hidden Line Manager
9.Vector Hidden-Line
When the drawing is selected and confirmed, the system activates the main Vector Hidden Line Manager form. In order to ensure predictable results, Vector Hidden Line Manager should be run only when referenced models are not being revised, unless the pre-processor option to copy referenced models to a temporary working directory is used. More information about this pre-processing option is available in the next section.
381
_ _______________
Before Using This Command

Pre-processing and Post-processing Options VHL provides some pre-processing and post-processing options which can allow you to customize your workflow. To use these options, you must modify your pds.cmd file so that it exports a variable called VHL_PPOPS. Pre-processing Option The pre-processing option, if used, forces VHL to copy reference model files into a temporary working directory before processing begins. This will prevent unpredictable results that could be obtained by running VHL on model files that were being modified during processing. To set up this option, you must export the VHL_PPOPS variable with a keyword that specifies the working directory that will be used to store the reference model files being processed. You can specify the desired working directory explicitly, or you can assign the systems temp directory to be the working directory. Refer to the examples below on how to specify the working directory: $ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path; In this case, temp lets the system know that the specified path is to be used as the working directory. $ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path savetemp; The addition of the savetemp variable will cause the system to retain files in the specified directory instead of automatically deleting them upon completion of the process. This command can be useful for troubleshooting purposes. EXAMPLE: $ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:c:\vhlfiles savetemp; Save and maintain copies of all reference files used when VHL is run on a drawing in the c:\vhlfiles directory. In either case, the system creates a subdirectory under the specified temporary directory to store the copied files. This directory will be named vhltmpaa, where aa is varied to creat a unique subdirectory. For instance, if the vhltmpaa, vhltmpab, and vhltmpac directories exist, the next subdirectory to be created would be named vhltmpad. Post-processing Options Post-processor options are activated by exporting the VHL_PPOPS variable with any of the following keywords: arc
382
_ _______________
Forces the system to recreate arcs out of VHL-stroked circular elements. backp
Removes the backplane (the invisible back face of a drawn object) and edges parallel to the viewing direction. If this option is not used, VHL retains edges from these faces even though they are overlaid by identical edges originating from a matching front face. For example, if you run VHL with backp enabled, on a view where you are viewing a pipe "end on" so it looks like a circle) the graphics for the inside edge (the other end of the pipe) will not show when moving or deleting the circle that represents the pipe in the VHL graphics. cell Regroups all elements that came from one original outermost element (type 2, 18, 19, 23, and so forth) so that they fall under one cell header. If the original element was a simple unnested element that was processed into several pieces, they will also be grouped under a cell header. This is useful if you intend to edit VHL graphics after the process has been completed. All PDS-placed EDEN components are drawn "on the fly" based on line information. The last step EDEN takes prior to placing the component in the model file is to make the graphical item a cell. When VHL is run, it breaks the cells down into simple geometries for processing. If the cell option is not used, the final output is the same elements that VHL processed. If the option is used, items that were cells are again made into cells. For instance, if a gate valve is processed by VHL without the cell option, the valve will be made up of various line elements. If you try to move, copy, or in any way modify the "valve," you will only get it one piece at a time, such as the valve operator stem. If the cell option were used, the valve could be manipulated as one item. Cells are named according to the following sequence: V0001H V0002H V0003H : V0009H V000AH V000BH V000CH : VZZZZH To avoid naming conflicts, previously existing VHL cells (recognized by the V and H terminators) are named according to the same convention. join Attempts successive processing iterations (passes) to join fragmented line strings and arcs. The number of passes is dependent on the VHL resolution. (A resolution of 1000 in PD_Draw results in one processing pass.)
383
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 min:X Eliminates any line string with a total viewplane-projected length (in UORs) less than the value of X, where X is any non-negative integer. keep Keeps the original VHL output file for troubleshooting purposes, and does not overwrite it with the post-processor output (.pOp) file. By default, the .pOp file is renamed to the final output file. The .pOp file resides in the same directory as the VHL post-processor output file. links Retains linkages passed from VHL to the post-processor so you can identify the origin of each output element. Links option should only be used along with Cell option. Links option alone does not effect processing. This is useful in troubleshooting. The linkage format is listed below: word1 - U bit set, class=0, wtf=7 word2 - 4265 (hex 10A9) before; 4266 after postprocessing word3 - areano (starting from 1) word4 - attachmentno (from type 5) word5 - bandno (starting from 1) word6 - surface type and surfaceno (low 12 bits) word7 - 4-byte elementno of header element as shown by EDG word8 - used only if word7 is large enough to need two words Total size: 8 words. Fields useful for tracking output elements are areano, attachmentno, and elementno. oldgg Carry source graphic group numbers onto output elements. This can be used with or without the cell header option. Be aware that graphic group numbers from different reference files may not be unique. pdslevels Ignore PD_Draw specified output levels, and carry output levels onto output elements. This feature is not supported by PD_Draw. Using this feature invalidates the current method for controlling VHL graphics, and will result in accumulation of graphics output from different runs. For example, using this option, a drawing with piping and equipment reference models using the delivered categories will have revision clouds and triangles, equipment physical, and physical not approved pipe supports all on level 10 in the drawing.
384
_ _______________
This option should be used only when the drawing will NOT be edited again inside PDS after VHL processing (as when the VHL document will be a deliverable). Running VHL with this post-processor option should be the last step for creating a deliverable non_PDS drawing. verbose Displays post-processor statistics.
385
_ _______________
VHL_PPOPS Command Environment Strings

These are examples of VHL_PPOPS command environment strings from the pds.cmd file with explanations: $ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile; Invokes arc restroking, backplane elimination, cell re-creation, joining of partial elements, deletes anything less than 5 UORs in length and creates temporary working copies of reference files in c:file. This is a typical user configuration. ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile savetemp keep links verbose; Invokes settings as above, with the addition of troubleshooting options. The savetemp option is added to keep the copied reference files after processing. The keep option maintains the .pOp file. Links allows tracing of element origins, and verbose provides statistical information which may be useful. This is a typical troubleshooting configuration.
386
_ _______________
Commands
Queues Displays a scrolling list of the queues available for performing the hidden line removal process.
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and defining queues. Reference Model Display by System Indicates that VHL should use reference file and category settings you selected in the Project Setup. These settings are used on the basis of disciplines within the drawing types. If you do not revise a given discipline within a drawing type in Project Setup, VHL uses the active display setting for each of that disciplines reference models in the drawing views, as defined in the drawing graphical environment. Category control will not be restored to its initial state if changed. You must reset categories manually after each run, if necessary. Reference Model Display by User Indicates that at the time of submission, you will select the reference file and category settings to be used. The selected settings and file will be applied to all views in all drawings submitted to VHL for processing. When you select this option, PDS displays the active settings for the first view in the first drawing, as a starting point. You can revise the display settings ON or OFF as required for the various reference files and categories. What you set will apply to all views in all drawings and will apply only to this one VHL submission. It will not affect the display in the graphical environment. Reference Model Display by Drawing Settings Presents no options. With this selection, each drawing and each view submitted will use its own settings, as displayed in the graphical environment. VHL will process the drawings in a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) fashion.
387
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Default VHL Drawings/Symbology based VHL Drawings Toggle Default VHL Drawings to output VHL drawings with the default VHL symbology, or Symbology based VHL Drawings to output VHL drawings based on different search criteria. Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 393 for more information. All Drawing Views/Drawing Views by User Processes all drawing views or lets you specify the individual drawing views you want processed. Plot after VHL/No Plotting Toggle to Plot after VHL to plot the drawing after completion of VHL processing. Selecting the plotting option activates the Plot Manager form that allows you to specify plotting parameters for the active drawing. Visible Only/Visible and Hidden Toggle to display visible lines only or both visible and hidden vector lines. Submission is Delayed/Submit Immediately Toggle to complete processing vector hidden line immediately or delay job submission to batch. Cleanup Off/On Toggle On to cleanup lines hidden by the object itself or Off to not perform cleanup. Lines of one object hidden by another object will still be shown.
Resolution Select and key in the desired resolution value. The higher the resolution value the longer processing takes, but the output is of better quality. The recommended starting value is 5,000, and the recommended range is 3000 to 10000. Day Hr: Min Displays the day and time for delayed transmission. These fields are active only when the submission toggle is set to Submission is Delayed. If prompted to... Select Drawing Type Do this: Select the drawing type for hidden line processing, and select Accept. Select the drawing or drawings to be used for vectorhidden-line-removal processing, and then Accept the drawing.
Select Drawing
388
_ _______________
Accept to Submit for Processing Accept the selected drawings for processing. Accept to Submit, or Modify Submit Data Select the appropriate toggle to set the desired parameters, then Accept the displayed parameter settings.
The system performs the vector hidden line process and places it in your drawing. A message indicating the time the job was submitted for processing is displayed if delay submission is selected. The list of drawings is then redisplayed for another selection if desired. The Vector Hidden Line Manager will automatically compress each drawing once the previous vector hidden-line removed graphics have been deleted and prior to initiating the vector hidden-line process for the drawing, reducing the disk space required for large batch requests. It will also reduce the size of the plot files that are generated after a vector hidden-line process by the Plot Manager outside of the graphics environment. To view your hidden line drawing after the vector hidden line process is complete, you must turn off the drawing view display. Refer to the following Viewing Hidden Line Graphics section for more information.
389
_ _______________
9.1
Viewing Hidden Line Graphics

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It, along with a series of forms, is used to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the drawing environment. The Compose Drawing and the Add Category commands are used to perform these steps.
Steps
1. Select Drawing Composition/Annotation from the Drawing Manager form, and activate the drawing on which the vector hidden line process was run. Notice that the wire frame drawing views are still displayed. 2. Select Drawing > Composition to activate the Composition palette.
3.
Select the Compose Drawing command. The system displays the Compose Drawing form with a list of drawing views for the selected drawing.
4.
Select the appropriate drawing view number from the list.
390
_ _______________
The system activates the Display/Snap/Locate toggles. 5. Toggle from Display On to Display Off to turn the display off for all reference models of the selected drawing view, and select Accept. The system updates the selected drawing view and turns off the display. 6. 7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each drawing view associated with the selected drawing. Select View > Viewing to activate the Viewing palette.
Viewing Hidden Line Graphics
8.
Select the Category command. The system activates the Drawing Categories form.
9.
Select the Add command.
391
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The system displays the Add Drawing Categories form.
10.
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to turn on only the hidden line categories, and select Accept. Select View Place a data point to identify the screen view(s) to display the vector hidden line graphics. The system displays the hidden line graphic categories in the selected view(s). An example of hidden line removed drawing graphics is shown in the following figure.
11.
12.
Select Cancel to exit the form.
392
_ _______________
9.2 Symbology Based VHL Drawings
This option allows you to output VHL drawings based on search criteria set with the Search Criteria for VHL command.
Symbology Based VHL Drawings
Before You Begin

Create the required search criteria. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 403 for information on creating VHL search criteria for Piping and Equipment. Edit the file DrwSymMap.mdb in Microsoft Access. Enter data in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc tables in Microsoft Access. Edit the PDS.CMD file to include the following line: $ENV{VHL_PPOPS} = hidpdslev pdslevels; This option can affect the way that regular VHL drawings are processed. To avoid inaccuracies, be sure to remove this line from the PDS.CMD file, or use a separate copy of the PDS.CMD file when processing Symbology based VHL drawings.
Operating Sequence
1. In PD_Shell, select Drawing Manager > Vector Hidden Line Manager.
2. 3.
Select the VHL drawings to create. On the Vector Hidden Line Manager form, set the Default VHL Drawings / Symbology based VHL Drawings toggle to Symbology based VHL Drawings.
393
_ _______________
4.
Set the Visible Only / Visible and Hidden toggle to Visible and Hidden if you want to display the hidden lines as well as the visible lines. Click Accept. The system creates the new VHL drawings in the vhl subdirectory under the drawings directory. For example, if the drawings directory is \dwg\665 for piping perspectives, the new VHL drawing is created in the \dwg\665\vhl subdirectory. This new drawing does not behave like a default VHL drawing. Hence, this step should be the final one in creating the drawings. Drawings in the \vhl subdirectory are intended to be standalone MicroStation drawings, and are not updated by subsequent modifications to PDS models.
5.
394
_ _______________
9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map
This section provides details for using the DrwSymMap.mdb file. This Microsoft Access file contains two database tables, SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc, which control the symbology based VHL drawing creation. Mapping the drawing types controls where the VHL drawings are generated, as well as the search criteria used to generate the drawings.
Drawing Type and Symbology Map
395
_ _______________
9.2.1.1
Drawing Type Map Association

This section provides details for using the DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc table.
Attributes
The following table shows the attributes used in the Drawing Type and Symbology Map, along with their data types and maximum length. Attribute Name Drawingtype MapNumber Data Type smallint character Length 2 30 Remarks Codelisted value
The Drawing Type attribute is the codelisted value for the desired drawing type. The Map Number attribute is a user-defined name that is used in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table.
Sample Map
Drawingtype MapNumber =========================================================== 663 PipeOneLine 665 PipePerspective
396
_ _______________
9.2.1.2 Search Criteria Symbology Map
The search criteria for the Piping and Equipment disciplines are generated using the Search Criteria for VHL command. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 403 for information on generating these search criteria.
Search Criteria Symbology Map
This section provides details for using the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. This Microsoft Access file controls the symbology associated with the search criteria used to create symbology based VHL drawings.
The search criteria for EE Raceway and FrameWorks Plus must be entered directly into the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. Refer to EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria, page 398 and FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria, page 401 for information on generating these search criteria.
Attributes
Attribute Name MapNumber Data Type character Length 30 Remarks Map Number from the Drawing Type table discipline_index_no from pdtable_112 search_number from pdtable_145 Codelisted from MicroStation color table MicroStation Level
SequenceNumber DisciplineIndexNum SearchCriteriaNumber Color
integer smallint character integer
4 2 24 4
Level
integer
Sample Map
MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level =============================================================== PipeOneLine 1 1 vhlpip1 2 2 PipeOneLine 2 1 vhlpip2 4 4 PipePerspective 1 1 vhlpip2 3 5 PipePerspective 2 1 vhlpipl 6 10
397
_ _______________
9.2.1.2.1
EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any EE Raceway drawings to be output as symbology based VHL drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly. You can define Raceway serach criteria such that all elements belonging to a particular oneline type or system are grouped together, or all elements derived from a specific table in the Raceway reference database are grouped together.
One-line Type Search Criteria

The syntax for one-line type search criteria is: [any text]_OLT_[One-line type number] where, [any text] is any text string. [One-line type number] is a number referring to the desired one-line type from the ol_type table in the re_xxx schema. Examples of one-line type search criteria include: Tray_OLT_1 (searching for trays), Cond_OLT_3 (searching for conduits), or All_Duct_Banks_OLT_5 (searching for duct banks). The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT keyword. For search criteria based on the one-line type, the software searches for all the children of that one-line type, as well as the one-line types childrens children, and places these elements on the indicated level using the specified color. For example, if the search criteria defined refers to the one-line type "Tray," the symbologies for all the Raceway connect points (RCPs) and one-lines belonging to this one-line type are changed in the VHL drawing. Also, the symbologies of all the Straights, Fittings and other children of the RCPs and one-lines are changed.
Entity Number Based Search Criteria

The syntax for search criteria based on the entity number is: [any text]_ENT_[Entity number] where,
398
_ _______________
[any text] is any text string. [Entity number] is the value of the entitynum property in the mscatalog table of the the re_xxx schema. Examples of entity number based search criteria include: OneLines_ENT_204 (searching for all one-lines, centerlines only), or LightFixtures_ENT_250 (searching for all light fixtures). The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT keyword. The ENT search criteria cannot be applied to all the tables listed in the mscatalog table.
EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria
System Type Number Based Search Criteria

Each one-line in EE Raceway (such as trays, conduits, etc.) can belong to a system or set of systems. Thus, the tray or conduit represented by the one-line carries cables belonging to the system to which the tray or conduit belongs. If a tray or conduit belongs to more than one system, one of systems in the set is called the active system, and the rest of the systems are called sub-systems. For more information on systems, refer to the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. For each element, the system checks whether a search criterion has been defined for the active system to which the element belongs. If so, the system changes the color and level of the element to match that assigned to the system. The syntax for search criteria based on system type number is: [any text]_SYS_[System type number] where, [any text] is any text string. [System type number] is the value of the system_num property in the ee_system table of the the re_xxx schema. Examples of system type number based search criteria include: Control_SYS_1 (searching for control systems), or HighVoltage_SYS_3 (searching for high voltage systems). The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the SYS keyword.
399
_ _______________
Sample Raceway Search Criteria Map

MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level ================================================================== RwayPerspective 1 5 Tray_OLT_1 3 5 RwayPerspective 2 5 Cond_OLT_3 6 10 RwayPerspective 3 5 LitFix_ENT_250 7 12
400
_ _______________
9.2.1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria
The search criteria for any FrameWorks Plus drawings to be output as symbology based VHL drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly. You can define FrameWorks+ search criteria such that all the elements that belong to the same category can be grouped together. The valid categories and their corresponding keywords are: Category Beam Column Brace Area member Arc member Volume member Keyword BEAM COLUMN BRACE AREA ARC VOLUME
FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria
Sample FrameWorks Plus Search Criteria Map

MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level ================================================================= StrucPerspective 1 3 BEAM 3 5 StrucPerspective 2 3 COLUMN 6 10 StrucPerspective 3 3 VOLUME 7 12
401
_ _______________
402
_ _______________
10. Search Criteria for VHL
This command allows you to define the search criteria used to create symbology based VHL drawings. Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 393 for more information. When you select the Search Criteria for VHL command from the Drawing Management form, the Search Criteria Data form is displayed.
Search Criteria for VHL
10.Search Criteria For VHL
Use this form to create, copy, revise or delete VHL search criteria for piping and equipment. This command only assigns search criteria for Piping and Equipment models. Search criteria for HVAC, FrameWorks Plus and EE Raceway must be defined directly in the Access database.
Options
Create Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database. Copy Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the record of an existing VHL search criteria file from the Access database and copies the corresponding data file. Revise Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which modifies an existing record of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.
403
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing VHL search criteria file as well as its associated record in the Access database.
404
_ _______________
10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form
When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
This form creates a VHL search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a corresponding record in the Access database.
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. File Specification The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file to be created. File Path The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the active settings. File Node The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file is located. This field retains the active settings.
405
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158. Revise AND/OR Relation Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Use this list to change the And/Or relationships between piping segment search criteria (table 12, piping segment data) and the search criteria for the component data in table 34, piping component data; table 50, piping/tubing data; table 67, instrument component data; and table 80, pipe support data. Each category of component search criteria data is related to the piping segment search criteria by a logical AND or a logical OR. By default, the logical relationship between the piping segment search criteria and the four categories of component search criteria is AND. This means that only components that meet the criteria defined for both sets of criteria are reported. Setting this relationship to OR increases the amount of data reported in that all components that match either set of criteria are reported. This is not an exclusive OR. With the OR setting, components that match both (or either) sets of criteria are reported. Equipment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzle form, which defines the equipment VHL search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click Accept.
406
_ _______________
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file, be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the search criteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the Search Criteria Data Creation form.
407
_ _______________
10.2

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.
Fields and Options

Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file record in the project control database. File Specification The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be created. File Path The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the active settings. Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria Piping Segment Form, page 154. Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form, which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria - Component Form, page 158. Define Volume Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the coordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see The Define Volume Form.
408
_ _______________
Revise AND/OR Relation Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, select Copy or Revise. The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data files. 2. 3. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and node. 4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click Accept.
409
_ _______________
10.3

Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
410
_ _______________
411
_ _______________
412
_ _______________
11. Plot Manager
This command provides a PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to the graphics environment. It is used to control reference model display, category display within the reference models, and category display within the drawing independently of the default or active settings in the drawing being plotted. The drawplotsize file in the project directory contains the default Drawing Plot Size Table. The drawplotsize file can be modified; refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 29 for more information. Plot Manager provides the following options: Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing can be set On or Off. Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing view can be set On or Off. Individual reference model display levels associated with a specific drawing view can be set On or Off. To plot a drawing using Plot Manager, you must first have a plot queue. Plot queues are created automatically when the software is installed. Plot Manager automatically displays the date and time for the following events: The most recent activation of the hidden-line graphics process. The date and time will be preceded by the text VHL:. The data and time will be added to the drawing.
Plot Manager
The plotting process. The date and time will be preceded by the text Plotted:. Although the date and time will be plotted on the hard copy of the drawing, the text will not be added to the actual drawing file. Through Project Data Manager, you can define the size, font, color, and weight of the text that displays this information. This text will be displayed on the unique "VHL/Plot Date/Time" drawing category. If the symbology options for this feature are not defined, the following defaults will be used: Text Size - uses drawings active character size
11.Plot Manager
Text Font - uses text font for coordinate labels Color - set to zero (0)
Weight - set to zero (0)
413
_ _______________
11.1
Plot Drawing
The Plot Manager automatically determines the plot size using the Drawing Plot Size Table in the project directory on the basis of the drawing size. This command specifies the drawing type and drawing to be plotted. There is also an option for including or removing reference models. Four optional queues, besides the default queue, can be created and defined.
Steps
1. Select Plot Manager from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the Plot Manager form with a Drawing Type display list.
2.
Select Drawing Type Select the drawing type of drawing(s) you wish to plot, and select Accept to accept. The system displays a Drawings display list.
414
_ _______________
3. Select Drawing Select all of the drawings to be plotted, and select Accept The system activates a form with I/Plot parameter file options and process and queue options. The system will automatically load the plot queue, plot size, levels, and design file name in the I/Plot parameter file you select.
Plot Drawing
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and defining queues. 4. Accept to Submit or Select Option Select Accept if submitting immediately with the default parameters file to the default queue. OR Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your drawing. If no parameters file is selected, the system will use the default file. Select a plot queue. If no queue is selected, the system will use the Default queue. Specify the number of copies to be plotted; the default value for this field is 1. Select a scale factor, if desired. The default size is 1.0 (full size); you may enter any positive number less than 1.0 if you would like to plot a smaller drawing for checking purposes. Set the No Rotation / Rotate 90 Degrees toggle to the desired position. Set the Default Categories and Reference Models / Select Categories and Reference Models toggle to the appropriate position.
11.Plot Manager
415
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 The default position tells the system to use the categories specified for that drawing type in the Project Setup form. If no default categories exist for that drawing type, the actively displayed categories will be plotted. This commands default toggle setting is different from the default setting of the Plot command in the graphics environment. Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is Delayed to specify the time to submit the plotted drawing. THEN Select Accept to submit with the chosen options. If Default Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the drawings, and sends the data to the plot queue for plotting. If Select Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the drawing information and displays a list of drawing views associated with the specified drawing. The options used to specify the categories to be turned on or off are displayed.
5.
Select Option or Select Drawing View Select the Drawing Categories option to review the list of drawing categories that are currently displayed in the view and to specify the categories to be turned on or off. Refer to the Drawing Categories section for more information. OR Select the drawing view and the Reference Models option to review and specify the categories to be turned on or off for individual reference models associated with the specific drawing view being plotted. Refer to the Reference Models section for more
416
_ _______________
information. OR Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for all reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned off for the drawing plot. OR Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for all reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned on for the drawing plot. 6. Select Accept to accept the specified plot processing information.
Plot Drawing
The system processes the information and submits the plotted drawing to the plot queue at the time previously specified. 7. Select Cancel to exit the form. To exit the form without submitting the plots, select the Shell or Top buttons. The actual drawing size is set by the plot queue in relation to the plot size.
11.Plot Manager
417
_ _______________
11.1.1
Drawing Categories
This option activates the Drawing Categories form. It is used to specify the categories to be turned on or off for the drawing plot. The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When you select a highlighted category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned off.
If prompted to... Select Category
Do this: Select the categories to turn off or on for the drawing to be plotted, and select Accept to accept the selected categories.
418
_ _______________
11.1.2 Reference Models
This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to select reference models and review and specify the individual reference model categories to be turned on or off for the specific drawing view being plotted.
Reference Models

The drawing view must be selected from the top of the Plot Manager form.
Commands
All Reference Models Display OFF Specifies that the categories displayed for all of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawing plot. All Reference Models Display ON Specifies that the categories displayed for all of the reference models associated with the drawing view to be turned on for the drawing plot. Reference Model Categories Reviews and specifies the categories to be turned on or off for a specific reference model.
11.Plot Manager
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name Displays the available models available for plotting.
419
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Reference Models option from the Plot Manager form. The system activates the Reference Models form with a list of reference models for the specified drawing view to be plotted. 2. Select Option or Select Reference Model Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for all of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawing plot. OR Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for all of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned on for the drawing plot. OR Select the desired reference model from the list of models at the top of the form, and select the Reference Model Categories option to review and specify the categories to be turned on or off for a specific reference model. The system activates the Review Model Categories form.
The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When you select a highlighted category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned off. 3. Select Category Select the categories that you wish to turn off or on for the drawing to be plotted.
420
_ _______________
4. Select Accept to accept the specified categories to be turned on or off. The system processes the specified drawing plot information and returns to the Plot Manager form.
Reference Models
11.Plot Manager
421
_ _______________
422
_ _______________
12. Project Planner
The Project Planner option activates the interactive graphics environment to allow you to create unassigned drawing views. After an unassigned view is created, it can be assigned to only one drawing.
Project Planner
Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select Project Planner from the Drawing Management form. The first time you select this option, the system prompts Key plan file does not exist, Accept to Create Select Accept to create the project key plan model. The system copies the model seed file to the file keyplan.dgn in the project directory. Key Plan model successfully created The system activates the graphics command environment for the project key plan model. Refer to the description of the graphics environment in the Drawing Composition/Annotation section for more information on working in graphics.
12.Project Planner
423
_ _______________
12.1
Project Planner Command Menu

The command menu at the bottom of the screen provides fast access to commonly used MicroStation and PDS commands. The following commands are available on the Project Planner Command Menu. PlotPlan The Plot Plan commands create unassigned drawing views, and allow specification of viewing options. View This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands result in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model. File This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot drawings or select another drawing. Element This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the Element Information settings box. Settings This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used during a graphics session. User This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your system such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
424
_ _______________
12.1.1 PlotPlan
Commands
PlotPlan
Drawing Views Activates the form used to create unassigned drawing views.
Viewing Options Activates a form consisting of viewing options.
Exit Exits Project Planner, and returns you to the Drawing Management menu.
12.Project Planner
425
_ _______________
12.1.1.1
Drawing Views
This command activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. It is used to create a drawing view. You can specify the drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or defining a volume about a specified named item. This command also specifies the active category data for the drawing view.
Commands
Standard View Buttons Define the orientation of the drawing view. These buttons include: Plan, Looking East, Looking North, Isometric, Looking West, Looking South, and Plan (Vertical). Delete Unassigned Views Deletes an existing unassigned view. Update Views Updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views. Select Model Identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created. Named Item Uses the coordinates and clipping volume of a named item to define them for the drawing view. Saved View Uses coordinates and clipping volume of the saved view to define them for the drawing view. Graphic Symbology Defines the graphic symbology for the Key Plan model.
426
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
View Number Key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters) for the unassigned drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is unique within the project. View Name Key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
Drawing Views
View Scale The system displays a scale display list. Select a new scale value for the view to be created. Model Number Key in the model number to identify the model for the unassigned drawing view or select the Select Model option from the bottom of the form to select the model from a series of forms. Drawing View Volume fields The Low and High columns and the Easting, Northing, and Elevation fields display the volume for the drawing view.

Steps
1. Select the Drawing Views command from the panel menu. The system activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. 2. 3. 4. Specify the required view information for the drawing view being created. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form. Select the Drawing View Volume fields and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Then, key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. OR Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the orientation and clipping volume of the drawing view. Key in the name of the saved view for the model specified in the Model Number field.
12.Project Planner
427
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 OR Select the Named Item option to use a pre-defined named item to define the clipping volume for the drawing view. (See the section describing the Named Item option.) 5. Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed coordinate values. Creating Drawing View 6. Select Cancel to exit the form.
428
_ _______________
12.1.1.1.1 Delete Unassigned View
This option activates the Delete Unassigned View form. It is used to delete an existing unassigned drawing view.
Delete Unassigned View
Field Descriptions
Orientation: Displays all of the possible orientations for a drawing view. Number/Name Displays all of the unassigned drawing views for a selected orientation.
Steps
1. Select the Delete Unassigned View option from the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. The system displays the Delete Unassigned Views form. 2. Select Orientation Select the view orientation for the unassigned drawing view to be deleted. The system displays the unassigned drawing views for the selected orientation. OR No Unassigned Drawing View Defined If there are no views for the selected orientation.
12.Project Planner
429
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 3. Select Unassigned Views Select the unassigned drawing views to be deleted and select Accept. The system deletes the selected view and updates the form.
430
_ _______________
12.1.1.1.2 Update Views
This option updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.
Update Views
12.Project Planner
431
_ _______________
12.1.1.1.3
Select Model
This option identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created. 1. The system displays the disciplines for the active project. Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline for the model file and select Accept. The system displays the Design Area display list for the selected discipline. 2. Select Area or Exit Select the design area for the model file and select Accept. 3. Select Model Select the model file and select Accept.
432
_ _______________
12.1.1.1.4 Named Item
This option activates the Create View Of Named Item form. It uses pre-defined named item to specify the data coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.
Named Item

The view number and name of the unassigned drawing view to be created must be specified in the Create Unassigned Drawing View form. The appropriate name attribute must have been defined for the item.
Steps
1. Select the Named Item option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form. The system activates the Create View Of Named Item form. 2. Specify Tag Number Select and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping Component Number, Engineered Item Number, Instrument Tag Number, Equipment Number, or Nozzle Number of the specified item. For an equipment nozzle, the system also prompts for the equipment group number. The system displays the Delta Coordinates associated with the named item. These coordinates define the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits the named item. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed
12.Project Planner
433
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 clipping volume. Accept the displayed values. The system returns to the Create Drawing View form and updates the coordinate values.
434
_ _______________
12.1.1.1.5 Graphic Symbology
This option activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form. It is used to define the graphic symbology (level, color, line weight, and line style) for the Key Plan model.
Graphic Symbology
Steps
1. Select the Graphic Symbology option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form. The system activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form. 2. 3. Select the field for the symbology value to be revised. Level
Place a data point along the slider to set the MicroStation display level. Color The system activates the Select Color form which displays the active color settings for the project. Select the color from the form and select Accept.
12.Project Planner
435
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Weight
Place a data point along the slider to set the weight. Select Symbology
Select the desired symbology option. 4. Accept the specified symbology changes.
436
_ _______________
12.1.1.2 Viewing Options
This command provides access to a set of options that allow you to manipulate the model views for each screen or window.
Viewing Options
12.Project Planner
437
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.1
Set View Orientation

The Plan View, Iso View, Looking North, Looking South, Looking East, and Looking West commands allow you to set the view orientation to one of the standard viewing directions. You can specify more than one screen with the same view.
The default screen orientations are:
Plan View Orients a screen to the plan view orientation. Isometric View Orients a screen to the isometric viewing direction. Looking North Orients a screen view looking north. Looking South Orients a screen view looking south. Looking East Orients a screen view looking east. Looking West Orients a screen view looking west.
438
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.2 Update Window
The Update View commands updates the screen display for a virtual screen or a specified view.
Update Window
Update Both Updates both (left and right) virtual screens. Update View Updates the selected window view. The system prompts you to select the view to update. Update Left Updates the left virtual screen. Update Right Updates the right virtual screen.
12.Project Planner
439
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.3
Rotate About View

The Rotate About View commands allow you to rotate a view about the selected axis (X, Y or Z). The angle follows the Right Hand Rule with the thumb pointing toward the positive axis.
Rotate About X Axis Rotates the horizontal axis of a screen view counter-clockwise. Rotate About Y Axis Rotates the vertical axis of a screen view counter-clockwise. Rotate About Z Axis Rotates the X and Y axes of a screen view counter-clockwise.
440
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.4 Match Planar Element
The Match Planar Element command allows you to establish a view normal to a planar element.
Match Planar Element
12.Project Planner
441
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.5
Rotation 3 Points
The Rotation 3 Points command allows you to rotate the view orientation so that you are looking normal to the X and Y planes defined by the three points. The first two data points define the X axis. The line between the first and third data points define the Y axis.
If prompted to... Enter first point @x axis origin
Do this: Place a data point to define the origin of the X axis. Place a data point to define the positive direction of the X axis. Place the third data point to define the Y axis. The viewing plane will be parallel to the plane defined by the three data points.
Enter second point on x axis
Enter point to define y axis
442
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation
This command activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.
Dialog View Rotation
12.Project Planner
443
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.7
Color Shading
The Permanent Color Shading and Color Shading options are used to render the contents of a screen view. When you select either of the color shading options the system displays a list of render options.
Select the option for the type of rendering to be performed and select the screen view to be processed. For Permanent Color Shading, select a view number from the form (18). The selected view will display with the specified render option until you change it. For Color Shading, place a data point in the screen view to be updated. The rendered view will revert to wireframe display when it is updated.
Wiremesh
This option renders the contents of a view(s) as a wiremesh display. Wiremesh display is similar to the default wireframe display in that all elements are transparent and do not obscure other elements. In a wiremesh display, however, curved surfaces are represented by a polygonal mesh rather than a simple wireframe. This representation can increase the realism of curved surfaces, although it may also increase the amount of clutter as more lines are displayed for surfaces that would normally be hidden.
444
_ _______________
Cross-Section
This option renders the contents of a view as a cross-section. If an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is active, the cross-section is cut at the X-Y plane of the ACS. Otherwise it is cut at the views active depth (parallel to the view).
Color Shading
Hidden Line
This option renders the contents of a view as a polygon display. In a polygon display, only parts of elements that would actually be visible are displayed. Lines hidden behind objects are removed to create a more realistic representation. MicroStation accomplishes this by decomposing each element into polygons. Hidden line removal processing is much slower than wireframe and wiremesh display, and the processing time is roughly equivalent to the other, more realistic type of rendering.
Filled Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a filled polygon display. A filled polygon display is identical to a polygon display except that the polygons are filled with element color. This creates an interesting cartoon-like effect that may be useful in some circumstances, particularly if the hardware can display only a limited number of colors.
Constant Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a constant shaded model. In a constant shaded model, each element is displayed as one or more polygons filled with a single (constant) color. The color is computed once for each polygon from the element color, material characteristics, and lighting configuration (see 3D concepts in the users guide). Curved surfaces are decomposed into a mesh of polygons. Each polygon is shaded with a single color and surfaces appear tiled.
Smooth Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a smooth (Gouraud) shaded model. In smooth shaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is more realistic than in constant shaded models because polygon color is computed at polygon boundaries and color is blended across polygon interiors. This gives surfaces a smooth appearance.
12.Project Planner
445
_ _______________
Phong Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model. This is the most realistic type of rendering supported by MicroStation. In a Phong shaded model, the color of each pixel is recomputed. Phong shading is useful for producing high-quality images when speed is not critical and very exact lighting effects are desired. If light sources are close to the objects being rendered, such as a spotlight shining on a home, Phong shading may be the only way to see the exact location of the light beam. Large numbers of computations slow display time considerably. In most instances, Phong shaded models are very similar to smooth shaded models and do not justify the increased processing time.
Stereo
This option renders the contents of a view as a 3D image. It creates a stereo pair of images and merges the two images into a single image, which you can view by wearing red/blue glasses. Put on the red/blue glasses making sure that the red lens is over the left eye and the blue lens is over the right eye. View the image with your eyes level and square to the screen.
446
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.8 Camera View
This option activates five options used to define the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera.
Camera View
Camera Setup
This option lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera and turn on the camera for the view. The camera lens is set with the Camera Lens option. To define the camera target use a data point. The point becomes the focal point (center) of the view. Objects beyond the target point will appear smaller due to the nature of the perspective projection. Objects in front of the target point will appear larger and may be excluded from the viewing pyramid. Place a data point to define the camera position. A dynamic pyramid displays to show the viewing volume with the camera at the pointer location. Place a data point to define the front clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portions of elements in front of this plane are not displayed. Place a final data point to define the back clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portions of elements beyond this plane are not displayed, but the view is turned on.
12.Project Planner
447
_ _______________
Camera Target
This option lets you set the target of a view camera without changing the camera position. This is like standing in one position and moving the camera to view different targets.
Camera Position
This option lets you set the position of a view camera without changing the camera target. This is like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views of the object.
Camera Lens
This option activates the camera lens settings display list. This list lets you set the angles and focal lengths of view camera lenses. The camera lens settings displayed are for the view chosen from the view number option.
Angle/Focal Length
The lens angle for the camera of the chosen view can be specified in degrees or as the lens focal length in millimeters (mm). You can also specify the lens by choosing a standard lens from the Standard option menu. The angles and focal lengths of the standard lenses are:
Standard Lens Fisheye Extra Wide Wide Normal Portrait Telephoto Telescopic Angle 93.3 74.3 62.4 46.0 28.0 12.1 2.4 Focal Length (mm) 20 28 35 50 85 200 1000
Camera Off
This option turns the camera view off.
448
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.9 Views
The Views commands allow you to manipulate views between two specified windows.
Views
Copy View copies a selected view display from one window to another. Swap View option allows you to change from either the right or left screen display. View On option activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1-4) on the right screen and window views (5-8) on the left screen. View Off option allows you to select and place a data point in the window views to turn specified views off.
12.Project Planner
449
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.10
Level Symbology On
This command provides the option to enable the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology.
450
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.11 Level Symbology Off
This command provides the option to disable the display of reference models with the active reference model symbology.
Level Symbology Off
12.Project Planner
451
_ _______________
12.1.1.2.12
Form Left/Right Screen
The Form Left Screen / Form Right Screen toggle sets forms to be automatically displayed on the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screen configurations.
452
_ _______________
12.1.1.3 Exit
Exit
12.Project Planner
453
_ _______________
12.1.2
View
Refer to View, page 197 for a description of the Viewing commands. The Viewing commands on this palette are the same commands as the ones appearing on the Viewing command palette for Composition/Annotation, with the exception of Viewing Options. The Viewing Options palette contains the same commands as described earlier in this chapter for the PlotPlan command palette. Refer to Viewing Options, page 437 for a description of the Viewing Options commands.
454
_ _______________
12.1.3 File
Commands
File
File Design Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.
Exit Exits the design file.
12.Project Planner
455
_ _______________
12.1.3.1
File Design
The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current design session. This command saves: MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes. PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of the Piping Designer base form.
456
_ _______________
12.1.3.2 Exit
Exit
12.Project Planner
457
_ _______________
458
_ _______________
13. Project Setup
This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaults for all drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawing directories, network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type. These fields, displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the options at the top of the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawing types are available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory for each drawing type.
Project Setup
13.Project Setup
There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and network address of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type may use either the project cell library or an alternate cell library. For more information about cells, the project cell library, and alternate cell libraries, refer to Drawing Manager Theory of Operation, page 24. Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined reference categories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of that drawing type. Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the defined reference categories, will not be availabel for selection as reference models.
Commands
Drawing Type Displays the project drawing types. Refer to Drawing Type, page 463 for more information. Reference Categories Defines a default list of reference-model data categories that determines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It also filters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verify option. See Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for more information.
459
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 Copy Drawing Type Copies an existing project setup. Refer to Copy Drawing Type, page 468 for more information. Remove Reference Removes all reference model data categories in a given drawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option for the project. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information. Plotting Categories Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for a specific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placing a data point on the appropriate category names. See Plotting Categories, page 471 for more information. Label Filter Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specific drawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point on the appropriate label names. See Label Filter, page 472 for more information.
Field Descriptions
All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms: Drawing Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file. Network Address Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file. Drawing Scale Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing. This sets the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise each drawing. The scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawing view can be modified at time of creation. English Units - m m" = n n" Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model.
Metric Units - n:nn Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.
Drawing Size Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border sizes.
460
_ _______________
Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. English A B C D E F Metric A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 8 1/2 X 11 11 X 17 17 X 22 22 X 34 34 X 44 28 X 40
Project Setup
13.Project Setup
840mm X 1189mm 595mm X 840mm 420mm X 595mm 297mm X 420mm 210mm X 297mm
Cell Library Name Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for this drawing type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen by default. Cell Directory Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides. Cell Network Address Specifies the network address of the machine on which the cell library resides. Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File Specifies whether the project seed drawing or an alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seed drawings, named draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory. See Seed Files, page 31 for more information on this option.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list. 2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form. The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to be selected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, the system activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawing type. If there is a drawing category whose default values you would like to copy, select the Copy Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types. When a drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the system will copy the default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type into the fields of the previously-selected drawing type.
461
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option. The system activates a form which allows you to modify a list of reference categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project. 4. Select the Plotting Categories option. The system activates a form which allows you to pick plotting categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project. 5. Select the Label Filter option. The system activates a form which allows you to pick annotation labels thta will be displayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment. 6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate for this drawing type.
462
_ _______________
13.1 Drawing Type
Drawing Type
13.Project Setup
This option activates the Drawing Type field. It is used to define the default settings for each drawing in a new project.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the Project Setup form and the Drawing Type display list. 2. Specify Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the list. You can have one default directory for each available drawing type in your project. 3. 4. Specify the default drawing file pathname/network address. Select the Reference Categories option to add reference categories to define which disciplines will be displayed in the drawings of the specified drawing type. See Reference Categories, page 465 for more information. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories so that the models within the specified disciplines will not be displayed in the drawings created in this directory. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information.
5.
6.
Accept or Reject Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.
463
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 OR Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
464
_ _______________
13.2 Reference Categories
This option activates a Reference Categories display list. It is used to determine the default disciplines that are available to be attached to a view when reference files are attached.
Reference Categories
13.Project Setup
It is also used to select the default reference categories and model data display categories for a specified drawing type. These categories can be toggled to on or off by highlighting or dehighlighting them. Like all of the other options on the Project Setup form, this option first displays a list of reference categories. It then allows you to selectively set the default model data display categories. If a discipline is not selected, it will not appear in the list of disciplines available for attachment.
Steps
1. Select the Reference Categories option to define reference models for the default drawing setup. The system activates the Reference Categories display list. 2. Select a category and select Accept. The system displays a list of available reference model data display categories, and indicates whether listed categories are turned On or Off during the drawing view creation and during VHL processing.
465
_ _______________
3.
You may control all categories for drawing view creation and VHL by using the Turn on All Create Categories and the Turn on All VHL Categories options. You may also toggle selected categories Off or On for drawing view creation and/or VHL processing by placing a data point on the current setting. When the categories are turned off, they are no longer highlighted. Turning a category On for creation means that whenever a drawing view is created, the specified category will be displayed in the drawing view. Turning a category On for VHL means that the specified category will be processed for VHL. Turning a category Off for VHL means that the specified category will be ignored by VHL.
4.
You may also override the default symbology for the active discipline by using the Define Reference Symbology command. This will allow each disciplines reference file symbology to be set for display, VHL (and, therefore, plotting). When the default symbology is used, the toggles on this form are all set to Disabled.
Toggling Color to the Enabled setting activates the Reference Model Symbology Color form. This form allows you to select which color you would like to use to represent the active discipline. These settings are used for the categories set to On for VHL.
466
_ _______________
Toggling Style to the Enabled setting displays the available line styles. This allows you to select which line style you would like to use to represent the active discipline. Toggling Weight to the Enabled setting displays the available line weights. This allows you to select which line weight you would like to use to represent the active discipline.
Reference Categories
13.Project Setup
Set the symbology options to obtain the desired effects. THEN Select Accept to return to the Project Setup form. OR Select Cancel to return to the Project Setup form and discard all changes. The user-defined reference symbology settings for VHL in this form apply only to the visible edges from the VHL output. Refer to the Hidden Line Data section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information about setting user-defined symbology for the hidden lines (as opposed to the visible edges).
467
_ _______________
13.3
Copy Drawing Type

This option activates the Copy Drawing Type field. It is used to copy previously defined defaults for the drawings in a specified drawing type directory for use in drawings in another drawing type. The default reference categories and model data display categories can then be modified.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the Project Setup form and a Drawing Type list with a list of the drawing types that have been defined. 2. Select the Copy Drawing Type option. The system displays a Drawing Type display list with the drawing types that have previously defined project setups. 3. Specify Drawing Type Select the drawing type of the project setup to be copied. The system automatically displays the information for that project setup. 4. 5. Select the Drawing Type option. Select the new drawing type for the copied project setup.
468
_ _______________
6. 7. Key in any modification to the location and size fields. Select the Reference Categories option to modify reference categories and model data display categories for the drawing type in the specified directory. See Reference Categories, page 465 for more information. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories from the drawing type in the specified directory. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information. Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form. 8.
Copy Drawing Type
13.Project Setup
9.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
469
_ _______________
13.4
Remove Reference
This option activates a Remove Reference display list. It is used to remove reference categories for the project setup default for creating a drawing or drawing view in a specified drawing type. This command removes the default model disciplines defined by the Reference Categories command or those included in a copied project setup.
Steps
1. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference model definitions from the project setup. The system displays the Remove Reference display list that contains all of the categories that are defined for the project.
2.
Select Disciplines to Remove and Accept Select the categories to remove and select Accept. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
470
_ _______________
13.5 Plotting Categories
This option activates a Plotting Categories display list. It is used to specify which levels in an attached model are to be plotted for a specific drawing type.
Plotting Categories
13.Project Setup
Steps
1. Select the Plotting Categories option to remove plotting category definitions from the project setup. The system displays the Plotting Categories display list that contains all of the categories that are defined to be plotted for the project.
2.
Select Categories to Remove and Accept Select the categories to remove and select Accept. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
471
_ _______________
13.6
Label Filter
This option activates a Label Filter display list. It is used to specify which types of labels will be displayed for a specific drawing type.
Steps
1. Select the Label Filter option to remove labels from the list. The system displays the display list that contains all of the labels that are defined to be displayed for the project.
2.
Select Labels to Remove and Accept Select the labels to remove and select Accept. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
472
_ _______________
14. Plot Setup Manager
This option activates the I/Plot Parameter Files form. It is used to create I/Plot Parameter records. Specifically, the Plot Manager sets the following I/Plot options automatically on the basis of available drawing management data: Queue, View, Region, Units, X Size, Y Size, Scale, Data Rescale, Rotation, Design, and Levels. To select any other I/Plot options, the I/Plot Parameter records must be pre-defined in the Project Control Database, and the I/Plot Parameter files must be created using the I/Plot product.
Plot Setup Manager
14.Plot Setup Manager
Commands
Create Creates I/Plot Parameter records. This option is activated by default when the form appears. See the Create I/Plot Parameter File, page 475 section for more information. Revise Revises existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Revise I/Plot Parameter File, page 477 section for more information. Delete Deletes existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Delete I/Plot Parameter File, page 479 section for more information.
473
_ _______________
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be created (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters long). Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define the I/Plot number. I/Plot Description Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to 40 characters). File Specification Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters). Path Name Defines directory path (up to 36 characters) specifying the directory to contain the parameter file. Workstation/Server Name Defines the workstation node address to contain the drawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
Steps
1. Select the Plot Setup Manager option from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the I/Plot Parameter File form. 2. Select one of the options. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
474
_ _______________
14.1 Create I/Plot Parameter File
This command is used to define the name, description, and the full file specification for an I/Plot Parameter file. You can choose from any of the I/Plot Parameter files created with the Plot Setup Manager at the time of plotting, otherwise the system will use the default I/Plot Parameter file.
Create I/Plot Parameter File
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be created (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters). Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannot be used to define the I/Plot number. I/Plot Description Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to 40 characters). File Specification Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters). Path Name Defines the directory path specifying the directory to contain the parameter file (up to 36 characters). Workstation/Server Name Defines the workstation node address to contain the drawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
475
_ _______________
Steps
1. Specify I/Plot Number Key in the I/Plot identification and location information. 2. Select Accept to create the I/Plot Parameter file. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
476
_ _______________
14.2 Revise I/Plot Parameter File
This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select a parameter file to revise. One or all of the fields can be revised using this option.
Revise I/Plot Parameter File
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be revised (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters). Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannot be used to define the I/Plot number. I/Plot Description Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to 40 characters). File Specification Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters). Path Name Displays the directory path specifying the directory location to contain the parameter file (up to 36 characters) Workstation/Server Name Displays the workstation node address to contain the drawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
Steps
1. Select the Revise option from the I/Plot Parameter File form. The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.
477
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 2. Select I/Plot Parameter for Revision Select the parameter file to be revised. The system displays the information on the file selected. 3. Revise I/Plot Data Place a data point in the field to be changed and key in the new information. 4. Select Accept to effect the changes to the I/Plot Parameter file. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
478
_ _______________
14.3 Delete I/Plot Parameter File
This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select the parameter file to delete. All of the parameter files accessed by the Drawing Manager can be deleted.
Delete I/Plot Parameter File
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be deleted (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters). Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannot be used to define the I/Plot number. I/Plot Description Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric value up to 40 characters). File Specification Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14 characters). Path Name Displays the directory path location of the directory that contains the parameter file (up to 36 characters). Workstation/Server Name Displays the workstation node address that contains the drawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
479
_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Delete option from the I/Plot Parameter File form. The system displays a list of the existing parameter files. 2. Select I/Plot Parameter file for Deletion Select the Parameter file to be deleted Accept to Delete I/Plot Parameter Definition Select Accept to delete. OR Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
480
_ _______________
Appendix A:
Error Messages
Appendix A Error Messages

The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory. pdsmc.msg - command field messages pdsme.msg - error and warning messages pdsmp.msg - prompts and messages pdsms.msg - status messages.
A. Error Messages
481
_ _______________
482
_ _______________
Glossary
absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. See also path name and relative path name. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls the message fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software which runs other software. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or batch) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. active depth
Glossary
active process
application software
batch processing
batch queue
branch point
cancel button
Glossary
cell
A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group, and then manipulated as individual elements. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database, NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in a database. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option.
character client
column
command confirm button
483
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of the design cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example, you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere, and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the most common of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors, and user-generated quit signals. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to accept previously selected elements, and to select commands from forms and menus. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as key-in field. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identify and accept elements, and activate windows and perform window manipulations. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, or processed by a specific program. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase. A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto which a user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.
coordinates
core files
cursor data button
data entry field
data point
database
database table
default
delete delimiter
device
484
_ _______________
directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files.
Glossary
A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, difference in longitude. An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about which information is stored; a relational database table. See interference envelope. A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the file name. See also relative path name.
domain dragging
easting
entity
envelope file file specification filename
form
full path name
Glossary
gadget
A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds to information. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies a command. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A relational database management system supported by RIS. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives.
header
hierarchy
icon
Informix Ingres interference envelope
485
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as a data entry field. A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, the Current Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field. A graphic representation or schema. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system, or it can mean the connected system. Network File System, the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system.
key
key-in field
keypoint keyword
menubar
message area
model network
NFS
node
node address
node name
northing
486
_ _______________
nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up pipe queues on the systems that are to have access to the resources. A relational database management system supported by RIS. In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. NQS
Glossary
Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view
parameter
path
A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path name and relative path name. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.
path name
PDS pipe queue
Glossary
place data point plane
To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but is level, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional. Reference Database. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes, vendors catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries, graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and other information of a similar manner. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. See also path name and absolute path name. To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution about a specific axis.
RDB reference database
relative path name
rotate
487
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values for a table. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and querying relational databases. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid, and so forth. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight. A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. To switch; to change between two alternatives. A name that provides access to an account on the system. Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that are stored in an attribute. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented as a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x,y,z). The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x, y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. See also active depth. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computers internal memory. The software uses virtual memory to store data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk until they are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly. rubberbanding schema schema file server
Structured Query Language SQL style
surface symbology table
toggle user name values
variable vector
view
virtual memory
488
_ _______________
working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.
Glossary
Glossary
489
_ _______________
490
_ _______________
Index
A active options 216 add drawing category 205 model category 283 align drawing view 286 align view 207 alternate cell libraries 35 drawing categories 33 alternate seed file 31 analyze 222 annotation 293 automatic labels 369 display report 330 drawing annotation symbology 343 overlay 338 labels centerlines 315 update 379 mass annotation options 298 name labels 346 options 349 overlay drawing 338 place cell 333 place labels options 304 place text and line 335 revision markers 328 update labels 321, 379 Approval form 186 approve drawing 192 approving reports 186 attach model 125, 275 overlay drawing 338 attributes specifying 154 automatic attach and verify reference models 128 labels 369 automatic (continued) labels (continued) define search criteria 373 label fence contents 372 automatic title block generation 42 B borders 27 bottom-to-top 197 button assignments 225 C camera 198 lens 448 off 448 position 448 setup 447 target 448 view 447 cascade 197 categories 33 cells and cell libraries 35 center window 200 cmds 195 code lists 39 color 343 shading 444 colors 223 compose drawing 263 align drawing view 286 delete drawing view 285 revise orientation 290 view data 288 unassigned views 292 view 265 compose drawing reference models 269 composing drawings 227 constant shading 445 coordinate label 358
Index
Index
491
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 copy 198 active drawing 271 another drawing 273 drawing 68 drawing view 253 reference models from active drawing 120 from another drawing 122 copy drawing drawing view data 71 copy view 207 create composite view 241 composite drawing view define views 244 composite drawing view 89 define views 93 from saved view 95 drawing 59 view 73, 228 define view location 239 named item 232 model 234 project 236 saved view 238 drawing view 73 ASCII file 63 define view location 84 from named item 77 model 79 project 81 from saved view 83 InterPlot parameter file 475 options 57 plan view 259 section view 256 cross-section 445 customization automatic title block generation 42 display dimensions in whole millimeters 49 Drawing Manager 41 nominal pipe diameter value 48 using alternate cell libraries 35 using alternate drawing categories 33 using alternate seed files 31 D database tables 36 define composite drawing with saved view 95 composite drawing with saved view 246 search criteria for automatic labels 373 view location 84, 239 delete 131 drawing 132 view 133, 285 InterPlot parameter file 479 unassigned view 429 detach models 127, 279 dialog view rotation 209, 443 dimensioning in whole millimeters 31, 39, 49 discrimination data file 140 display dimensions in whole millimeters 31, 39, 49 report 330 drawing annotation 293 coordinate label 358 mass annotation command 295 name label 346 symbology 343 bar menu review attribute 340 select another drawing 221 borders 27 categories 33, 418 review/revise 204 category 200, 203 add 205 remove 206 composition 227 compose drawing 263 compose drawing view 265 copy drawing view 253 copy drawing view 86 create composite view 241 drawing view 228 plan view 259 section view 256 copy 68 create 59 management 51 manager 55
492
_ _______________
drawing (continued) overlay 338 plot size 29 pull-down menu 196 report 135 symbology 343 views delete unassigned view 429 graphic symbology 435 named item 433 Project Planner 425 select model 432 update views 431 what is a drawing? 25 drawing manager before using 23 create options 57 Drawing Manager customization 41 overview 21 theory of operation 24 drawing view what is a drawing view? 26 E edit text 327 element 195 commands 222 eqp_object.dwg mass annotation 296 equipment 195 centerlines 315 labels mass annotation 296 error messages 481 exit 211, 215, 453, 455, 457 F features 19 file 195 pull-down menu 211 in Project Planner 455 file design command 214, 456 filled hidden line 445 fit 200 fonts 223 forms left/right screen 452 G graphics symbology 435 graphics environment 195 grid on/off 208 H help 225 hidden line 445 I in_object.dwg mass annotation 296 instrumentation labels mass annotation 296 introduction 19 isometric view 438 L label category type 311 fence contents 372 placement 304 labels 39 equipment centerlines 315 mass annotation 295 options 298 name labels 346 options 349 place labels options 304 update annotation 379 update labels 321 labels.<xxx> mass annotation 297 lens 448 level symbology off 207, 451 on 207, 450 levels 199 line weight 343 looking east 438 north 438 south 438 west 438
Index
Index
493
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 M magnify 200 mass annotation 295 drawing types 297 equipment 296 instrumentation 296 labels 295 labels.<xxx> 297 object types 296 options 298 reject label 300 reject labeling point 300 skip current label 300 window center to item 300 <xxx>_object.dwg file 296 match planar element 441 match planar element 209 measure distance 341 millimeters dimensions displayed in 31, 39, 49 model categories 280 category add 283 remove 284 review/revise 282 move down 207 left 207 right 207 up 207 N name label 346 name labels options 349 named item 232, 433 model 234 project 236 named item 77 model 79 project 81 Next 197 O open close 197 overlay drawing 338 overview Drawing Manager 21 P permanent color shading 444 phong shading 446 place cell 333 text and line 335 place labels 304 options 304 plan view 438 planar element match 441 plot drawing 414 drawing categories 418 reference models 419 manager 413 plot drawing 414 setup manager 473 plot command 212 plot plan drawing views 426 pull-down menu 425 viewing options 437 plot size 29 Previous 197 project planner 423 command menu 424 seed file 31 setup 459 Project Planner drawing views 425 viewing options 425 project planner pull-down menus file 455 plot plan 425 view 454 project.ddl file 36 pull-down menu drawing 196 file 211 file design 214, 456 plot 212 viewing direction 209 viewing more 207
494
_ _______________
R redefine individual views 114 reference models 118, 269, 419 attach model 125, 275 automatic attach verify 277 copy another drawing 273 detach model 279 reference models automatic attach verify 128 copy active drawing 271 from another drawing 122 copy from active drawing 120 detach model 127 reject label 300 remove drawing category 206 model category 284 render 198 render options 444 rendering 224 report drawing 135 files 140 output 141 records 140 report data discrimination data file 140 files and records 140 format file 140 report output 141 review attribute 340 drawing category 204 review/revise model category 282 revise composite drawing view data 112 individual views 114 drawing 104 drawing view 107 data 109 reference models 118 revise drawing view data 109 revise orientation 116 InterPlot parameter file 477 revise (continued) options 102 orientation 116, 290 text 326 view data 288 revision markers 328 rotate 3 points 442 about view (x,y,z) 440 rotate view about x axis 209 about y axis 209 about z axis 209 absolute 209 by 3 points 209 element 209 relative 209 rotation 199 S saved view 83, 238 search criteria for automatic labels 373 for VHL 403 Search Criteria - Piping Segment form 154 seed file alternate 31 select another drawing 221 model 432 set active depth 210 absolute 210 relative 210 display depth 210 absolute 210 relative 210 drawing symbology 343 view orientation 438 settings 195 commands 223 setup 23, 459 shading color 444 show active depth 210 display depth 210 smooth shading 445 standard notes 39
Index
Index
495
_ _______________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - April 2002 stereo 446 swap 197 symbology drawing 343 T tables Database 36 text size 343 theory of operation 24 tile 197 title block automatic 42 typefaces 13 U unassigned views 292 units working whole millimeters (no decimal places) 31, 39, 49 update 197 all 207 annotation labels 379 labels 321, 379 edit text 327 revise text 326 left 207 right 207 view 207 views 431 window 439 user commands 225 preferences 225 usr 195 V vector hidden line manager viewing hidden line graphics 390 vector hidden line manager 381 before using 382 processing options post 382 pre 382 VHL 381 processing options 382 search criteria 403 view 195 commands 197 depth 210 manipulations 449 on 207 pull-down menu from Project Planner 454 rotation 209, 443 toggle 207 update 439 viewing commands 200 direction 209 hidden line graphics 390 more 207 options 201 viewing options 200 camera view 447 color shading 444 dialog view rotation 209, 443 form screen 452 from plot plan pull-down menu 437 match planar element 441 Project Planner 425 rotate about view 440 rotation 3 points 442 set view orientation 438 update window 439 views 449 W weight display toggle 208 whole millimeters dimensions displayed in 31, 39, 49 window area 200 center 200 update 439 wiremesh 444 working units whole millimeters (no decimal places) 31, 39, 49 Z zoom in 200 out 200
496

Users Guide Addendum
February 2003
DPDS3-PB-200004B
For PDS version 07.02.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200004A.
Drawing Manager Users Guide Addendum February 2003
Table of Contents
Create Drawing (replaces 4.1.1) .............................................................................. 499 Create Drawing Data from ASCII File (replaces 4.1.2) .......................................... 503 Revise Options Form (replaces 4.4)......................................................................... 509
Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)..................................................................................... 511 Revise Revision .............................................................................................................. 514 Revise Site_ID for Drawings.......................................................................................... 516
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project................................................................................ 517 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type .................................................................... 518 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing ............................................................................. 519
Project Setup (replaces 13.0) ................................................................................... 520
498
Create Drawing (replaces 4.1.1)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (pp 59-62 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been added: Site ID field See the following text for details.
This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using the drawing filename and parameters specified. The illustrations in this section reflect a Equipment Arrangement Drawing type; however, the operation is the same for all drawing types. The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator Reference Database Users Guide for more information on project creation.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created. Special characters such as $@-/=#*and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number. Drawing Name Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created.
499
Default Scale Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing scale options. Select the desired drawing scale value from the list. English Units - m m"=n n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model. OR Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model. Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. For the complete list of delivered drawing scale values, refer to the Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager. The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager. Drawing Size Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing border size options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list. Refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 29 for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. English Units A B C D E F Metric Units A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 840mm X 1189mm 595mm X 840mm 420mm X 595mm 297mm X 420mm 210mm X 297mm 8 1/2 X 11 11X17 17X22 22X34 34X44 28X40
500
Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1202. The drawing size values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager. Drawing File Name The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characters total) as the drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number is greater than 11 characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension. You can modify the Drawing File Name. Drawing File Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file. Workstation/Server Name Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file. Last Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user. Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. This field is optional. Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. This field is optional. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Site ID This field specifies which work site owns the model. When creating models from the master site, the Site ID can be set to any site appearing in pdtable_105. When creating models from a satellite site, the Site ID is automatically set to the value for the satellite site. The master site can create models for any site. A satellite site can only create models for itself.
Steps
1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form. The system displays the Create Drawing form. 2. Key in the drawing number and name information. 3. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices. Select the desired choice from the scroll list. 4. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information.
501
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data. 6. Select the Supplemental Title Data Block button if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47. 7. Select the Site ID for the site to which the drawing will belong. 8. Accept or Reject Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept. Creating Drawing The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing design file. It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field. 9. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files. OR Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.
502
Create Drawing Data from ASCII File (replaces 4.1.2)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (p. 63-67 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been added: Site ID setting See the following text for details.
This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to create drawings and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define as many drawings as necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing views for every drawing. Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. You can select the active drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. You can also submit the process immediately or select delayed batch processing. This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing. The batch process returns a mail message that reports any errors that occurred during the creation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created, and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, the related drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create Drawing View command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specified reference model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you a mail message indicating which reference models were not attached. Note: The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.
503
Commands
Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time Submits or delays submission of the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, the system displays time fields, which allow you to delay submission until a more convenient time.
Field Definitions
ASCII File Name Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing. This file contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views. Directory Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides. Network Address Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.

You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the right of the colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number to Network_Address is information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a new drawing. Every drawing view is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Each drawing view must be associated with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Models is information defining a drawing view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing views with one ASCII file.
504
Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below.

Drawing_Number:00ascii02 Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation !Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each !drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields !is related to the proceeding drawing name. Default_Scale:3/8"=1 Drawing_Size:1 File_Spec:draw005.dgn Path_Name:c:\newpipe\ Network_Address:deason !Next line begins drawing view definition View_Number:d0005 View_Name:Plan !This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02 !ASCII Creation drawing. View_Scale:3/8"=1 Orientation:1 Easting_Low:1358:0 Northing_Low:415:0 Elevation_Low:9:11 Easting_High:1376:0 Northing_High:433:0 Elevation_High:27:11 Composition_Point:5 Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01
File Field Definitions

Site_ID: An optional value for the site ID. If no value is specified, the site ID will be the same as the project site ID set in pdtable_101. If the project does not belong to a site, the site ID is set to NULL. Drawing_Number: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case letters only. Special characters such as $-/=#* and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number. Drawing_Name: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional. Default_Scale: Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the default scale is used. Drawing_Size: Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to the Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standard note value and not the standard note text must be used in this field. This value can be found in Standard Note 1202. File_Spec: Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure to include the .dgn extension. Path_Name: Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in the Project Setup command.
505
Network_Address: Key in the network address where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the data specified in the Project Setup command. View_Number: Key in a drawing view number for this drawing. View_Name: Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view. View_Scale: Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the default scale for the drawing is used. Orientation: Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use the standard note text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620. Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.) Note: The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format that MicroStation will accept for keyed-in dimension data. For example, the value for two feet, six and one half inches may be expressed as 0:30.5, 26.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5",or 2.55. Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point. Composition Point Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to a composition point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for rightbottom, or 5 for center composition. Note: This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if you do not wish to assign a value to it. Reference_Models: Key in the reference model numbers as used in the model management data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with a comma. The maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will be followed by another line of model numbers with a dash (-) to define more reference models. Each drawing created from an ASCII file must have at least one value for this keyword.
Other Valid Keywords

You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions. Saved_View: This keyword allows you to create drawing views using data from existing saved views. The syntax for this keyword is: Saved_View:model number,saved view name,OPTION
506
The model number setting specifies the model that contains the saved view. This setting is case sensitive. The saved view name setting defines the saved view from which to read data when creating the new drawing view. This setting is not case sensitive. The OPTION setting specifies whether or not models attached to the source view will also be attached to the created view. The valid values for this setting are ALL, which attaches all the models, and NO_ATTACHED, which attaches none of the models. The default setting is ALL. Note: If any of the clipping coordinates or view orientation are specified in the ASCII file after the saved_view keyword, those settings override the settings in the saved view. For example, in the drawing view generated using the following ASCII file, the Easting coordinate would be 100, and the drawing view orientation would be Top, regardless of the Easting High and Orientation settings in the saved view.
saved_view:model1,ram1,ALL Easting_High:100:0 Orientation:1
MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE You may add keywords to the ASCII file that specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated onto themselves) or just "sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view. The default is that drawings will be created with propagated structural models; however, the keywords MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be included within the drawing view definition before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword to specify which type to attach. Caution: The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been selected within the ASCII file, but has not been defined within the model management data of the Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations: 1. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; this would mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for the sparse models exist in PD_Table 113. 2. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but no models have yet been created. Note: The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creating only drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse). If no keyword is used, by default the drawing views will be created using propagated structural models. MATCHLINES You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automatically create match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawing view.
507
If prompted to... Keyin Data or Select Option
Do this: Key in the file specifications, then set the submit toggle to the desired setting. Select Accept to create the drawing(s) and drawing view(s) with the specified ASCII file.
Note: If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view is associated and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. In this situation, you must create the desired drawing view manually. If a reference model cannot be attached, an error will be reported to you through the mail message, and the drawing view will be not be created. In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, go to the Revise Drawing form and select Load Title Block.
508
Revise Options Form (replaces 4.4)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (p. 102-103 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been added: Revise Revision Revise Site ID for Drawings See the following text for details.
This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the database information for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.
Commands
Revise Drawing Revise drawing attributes. Revise Drawing View Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file. Revise Revision Revises an existing drawing revision. Revise Site_ID for Drawings Assigns a drawing file to a different work site.
Steps
1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form. The system displays the Revise Options form.
509
2. Select one of the Revise options. For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined in Standard Note 2000) in a display list.
510
Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (p. 104-106 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Automatic date update in Revised By and Checked By fields See the following text for details.
This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form, which revises an existing drawing.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number. Drawing Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name. Completion Status Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage complete. Default Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale. Previous Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user. Current Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
511
Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Revised By field is optional. Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Checked By field is optional. Approved By (1-4) Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are optional. Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still available as well. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for more information on the Supplemental Title Block Data.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form. The system displays the Drawing Types. 2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for the project. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept. The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing. 4. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes. 5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.
512
6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47. 7. Accept the drawing revisions. The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes. 8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options form.
513
Revise Revision
The Revise Revision form is used to revise existing drawing revisions.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user. Drawing Name This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user. Completion Status This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user. Default Scale This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user. PDS Revision Numbers This field displays the existing revision numbers for the drawing. Select a revision from the list to display information about that revision. Current Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Revised By field is optional. Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Checked By field is optional. Approved By (1-4) Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are optional.
514
Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still available as well. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Revision option from the Revise Options form. The system displays the Drawing Types. 2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for the project. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept. The system displays the Revise Revision form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing. 4. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes. 5. Accept the drawing revisions. The system updates the database. 6. You can select another revision, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Select Drawing form.
515
Revise Site_ID for Drawings

This option allows you to reassign drawings to different work sites by changing the site ID by project, drawing type, or drawing. Note: This option is only available at the master site.
Options
By Project Displays drawings by project for Site ID revision. By Drawing Type Displays drawings by drawing type for Site ID revision. By Drawing Displays individual drawings for Site ID revision.
516
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project

This option allows you to update the Site ID for drawings in the active project. Note: This option is only available at the master site.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Lists all the drawings in the active project. Source Site_ID Displays the current site to which the drawing belongs. Destination Site_ID Specifies the new site to which the drawing will belong. Change All to Same Site_ID Allows you to change all drawing in the active project to belong to the same site.
Operating Sequence Specific Drawings

1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays. 2. Select the Destination Site_ID to change. The Select Site form displays. 3. Select a site. 4. Click Accept. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with the new Site ID.
All Drawings in Project

1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays. 2. Click Change All to Same Site_ID. The Site_ID for All Models field displays.
3. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field. The Select Site form displays. 4. Select a site. 5. Click Accept. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site ID.
517
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type

This option allows you to change the Site ID for drawings of a particular drawing type. Note: This option is only available at the master site.
Operating Sequence Specific Drawings

1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form. 2. Select a drawing type. 3. Click Accept. 4. Select the Destination Site_ID to change. The Select Site form displays. 5. Select a site. 6. Click Accept. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with the new Site ID.
All Drawings of Drawing Type

1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form. 2. Select a drawing type. 3. Click Accept. 4. Click Change All to Same Site_ID. The Site_ID for All Drawings field displays.
5. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field. The Select Site form displays. 6. Select a site. 7. Click Accept. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings forms displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site ID.
518
Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing

This option allows you to change the site ID for individual drawings. Note: This option is only available at the master site.
Operating Sequence
1. Select By Drawing from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form. 2. Select a drawing type. 3. Click Accept. 4. Select a drawing. 5. Click Accept. 6. Select the Destination Site_ID to change. The Select Site form displays. 7. Select a site. 8. Click Accept. The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with the new Site ID.
519
Project Setup (replaces 13.0)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (pp 459-462 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been added: Supplemental Title Block Data button See the following text for details.
This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaults for all drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawing directories, network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type. These fields, displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the options at the top of the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawing types are available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory for each drawing type. There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and network address of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type may use either the project cell library or an alternate cell library. For more information about cells, the project cell library, and alternate cell libraries, refer to Drawing Manager Theory of Operation, page 24. Caution: Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined reference categories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of that drawing type. Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the defined reference categories will not be available for selection as reference models.
520
Commands
Drawing Type Displays the project drawing types. Refer to Drawing Type, page 463 for more information. Reference Categories Defines a default list of reference-model data categories that determines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It also filters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verify option. See Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for more information. Copy Drawing Type Copies an existing project setup. Refer to Copy Drawing Type, page 468 for more information. Remove Reference Removes all reference model data categories in a given drawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option for the project. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information. Plotting Categories Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for a specific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placing a data point on the appropriate category names. See Plotting Categories, page 471 for more information. Label Filter Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specific drawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point on the appropriate label names. See Label Filter, page 472 for more information.
Field Descriptions
All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms: Drawing Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.
521
Network Address Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file. Drawing Scale Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing. This sets the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise each drawing. The scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawing view can be modified at time of creation. English Units - m m" = n n" Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model.
Metric Units - n:nn Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.
Drawing Size Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border sizes. Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. English A 8 1/2 X 11 B 11X17 C 17X22 D 22X34 E 34X44 F 28X40 Metric A0 840mm X 1189mm A1 595mm X 840mm A2 420mm X 595mm A3 297mm X 420mm A4 210mm X 297mm
522
Cell Library Name Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for this drawing type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen by default. Cell Directory Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides. Cell Network Address Specifies the network address of the machine on which the cell library resides. Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File Specifies whether the project seed drawing or an alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seed drawings, named draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory. See Seed Files, page 31 for more information on this option. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block Data form.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form. The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list. 2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form. The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to be selected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, the system activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawing type. If there is a drawing category whose default values you would like to copy, select the Copy Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types. When a drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the system will copy the default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type into the fields of the previously selected drawing type. 3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option. The system activates a form that allows you to modify a list of reference categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project. 4. Select the Plotting Categories option. The system activates a form that allows you to pick plotting categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project. 5. Select the Label Filter option. The system activates a form that allows you to pick annotation labels that will be displayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment. 6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate for this drawing type.
523
7. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data command if you want to add information to the title block.
524
Index
create drawing, 499 drawing data from ASCII file, 503 drawing create, 499 create data from ASCII file, 503 revise, 511 project setup, 520 revise drawing, 511 options, 509 revision, 514 site ID for drawings, 516 site ID for drawings by drawing, 519 site ID for drawings by drawing type, 518 site ID for drawings by project, 517 revision revise, 514 setup project, 520 site ID revise, 516 revise for drawings by drawing, 519 revise for drawings by drawing type, 518 revise for drawings by project, 517
525

Users Guide Addendum
October 2004
DPDS3-PB-200004C
For PDS version 07.03.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200004B.
Table of Contents
Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)...............................................................................528 Compose Drawing (replaces 6.6) .............................................................................531
Area Volume Graphics....................................................................................................534
527
Drawing Manager Users Guide Addendum October 2004
Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (p. 611-613 in the PDS 7.2 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Added Drawing File Name field description See the following text for details.
This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form, which revises an existing drawing.
Field Descriptions Drawing Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number. Drawing Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name. Drawing File Name This field is updated automatically when you change the Drawing Number. You can also place a data point in the field and key in a new drawing file name of up to 14 characters. Completion Status Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage complete. Default Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale. Previous Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.
528
Current Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Revised By field is optional. Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Checked By field is optional. Approved By (1-4) Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are optional. Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still available as well. Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional. Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command. Supplemental Title Block Data Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for more information on the Supplemental Title Block Data.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form. The system displays the Drawing Types. 2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept. The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for the project. 3. Select Drawing Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept. The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing. 4. Select Attribute for Revision Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes.
529
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data. 6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47. 7. Accept the drawing revisions. The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes. 8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options form.
530
Compose Drawing (replaces 6.6)

Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager Users Guide (p. 263-264 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Volume Graphics command See the following text for details.
This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement and characteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border.
You can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with a series of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the drawing environment.
Field Descriptions
531
Commands
Display / Snap / Locate These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list. Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display on the screen and on plotted drawings. Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference models. Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the reference models into the active file. Compose Drawing View Select to place the active drawing view within the drawing border. Reference Models Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models, add, remove, and review model categories. Refer to Reference Models, page 269 for more information. Delete Drawing View Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawing view for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection. The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the database files and deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from the drawing. It also detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view. Align Drawing View Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views. Refer to Align Drawing View, page 286 for more information. Revise View Data Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise View Data, page 288 for more information. Revise Orientation Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise Orientation, page 290 for more information. Unassigned Views Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you can choose a view to be composed. Refer to Unassigned Views, page 292 for more information. Volume Graphics Select to display clash and design area volumes as graphical blocks in the drawing.
532
If prompted to... Select Drawing View Select Options
Do this: Select the appropriatect drawing view number from the list of drawing views. Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawing views) to on or off, then select any other appropriate option.
533
Area Volume Graphics

The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the drawing so that you can see their location.
For the Drawing Graphics environment, you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator. Please refer to the Project Administator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology. Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments, you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. In addition, the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping, Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments:
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL
Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables.
534
Commands
Place Diagonal Lines - Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier identification in the drawing. Add / Revise Graphics - Select the area to add to the model, or unselect an already selected drawing to remove it from the drawing. Remove Graphics - Removes the selected area from the drawing. Hilite Graphics - Highlights the area in the drawing. Update Graphics - Updates areas that are already displayed in the drawing. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed, or if the drawing view definition has changed. Drawing view definition includes drawing view location in the drawing, drawing view scale, and drawing view location.
535
Index
Area Volume Graphics command ..................534 compose drawing.......................................................531 drawing compose......................................................531 revise ......................................................... 528 revise drawing ...................................................... 528 volume graphics displaying .................................................. 534
536

PDS Drawing Manager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDS Drawing Manager

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDS Drawing Manager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What commands are available in the Area Volume Graphics command?

What commands are available in the Area Volume Graphics command?

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph General Information

Drawing Manager ......................................................................................................................... 4.1 Create Options .....................................................................................................................

Saved View .............................................................................................. Define View Location ..............................................................................

Create Composite Drawing Views Example ...........................................................

Discrimination Data Deletion Form ........................................................................

Report Multiple Submit Form .............................................................................

Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................................. Approve Drawing ..............................................................................................................

5.4 5.5 5.6 6.

Saved View ............................................................................................................. Define View Location .............................................................................................

6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

12.1.1.3 12.1.2 12.1.3

View .................................................................................................................. File ....................................................................................................................

More information indicates there is additional or related information.

Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

About this users guide

Drawing Manager Introduction

Drawing Manager Features

Overview of Drawing Manager

Before Using Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager Theory of Operation

Drawing Plot Size

MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA Engineering Discipline Data

Design Area Data

DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA Drawing Data

Drawing View Data

Drawing View Reference Model Data

Composite Drawing View Data

Drawing Revision Data

Drawing Setup Data

Reference Model Display Category Setup Data

Plotting Default Data

Standard Notes / Code Lists

Drawing Managers Output

Customizing Drawing Manager

Automatic Title Block Generation

Automatic Title Block Generation

The ASCII Text Node Definition File

Automatic Title Block Generation in Create Drawing

Automatic Title Block Generation in Approve Drawing

Supplemental Title Block Data

Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters

Using the Drawing Management Commands

When to Use These Commands

Before Using These Commands

Create Drawing from ASCII File

Before using this command

Create Drawing from ASCII File

File Field Definitions

Other Valid Keywords

Create Drawing from ASCII File

Specify Drawing Name